OPERATION MANUAL CX-Process Monitor Plus SYSMAC WS02-LCMC1-EV2

OPERATION MANUAL CX-Process Monitor Plus SYSMAC WS02-LCMC1-EV2
Cat. No. W428-E1-03
SYSMAC
WS02-LCMC1-EV2
CX-Process Monitor Plus
(Ver. 2.1)
OPERATION MANUAL
WS02-LCMC1-EV2
CX-Process Monitor Plus (Ver. 2.1)
Operation Manual
Revised June 2009
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
Before Installing the CX-Process Monitor Plus
Installing the CX-Process Monitor Plus signifies that you accept the software user’s license agreement
displayed during the installation process. Do not install this software if you do not accept the user’s
license agreement. Warranty and after-sales services are available only to users that register with the
enclosed registration form. Please fill in the registration form and return it to OMRON.
 OMRON, 2005
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
3
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
4
Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
SECTION 1
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-2
Basic Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
SECTION 2
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
2-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
2-2
Connecting the PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
SECTION 3
Exchanging Data with Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
3-1
Data Exchange Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
3-2
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
3-3
Loop Control Unit Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
SECTION 4
Monitor Screen Functions and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
4-1
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
4-2
Using the CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
4-3
CX-Process Tool Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
4-4
Starting and Stopping the CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
4-5
Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
4-6
Screen Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
4-7
Control Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
4-8
Tuning Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
4-9
Trend Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
4-10 Batch Trend Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
4-11 Segment Program 2 Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
4-12 Graphic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
4-13 Annunciator Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
4-14 Operation Guide Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
4-15 Alarm Log Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
4-16 Operation Log Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
4-17 System Monitor Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
4-18 System Monitor Log Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
Configuration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
5-1
Basic Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
5-2
Basic Configuration Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
5-3
System Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
5-4
Creating Graphic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
5-5
Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
5-6
System Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203
5-7
Checking Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
SECTION 6
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Appendices
A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
231
B
Differences between Trend Screens and Batch Trend Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
viii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the WS02-LCMC1-EV2 CX-Process Monitor
Plus software package and includes the sections described below. The CX-Process Monitor Plus is
used to control and monitor the operation of the CS1W-LC001 Loop Control Unit, the CS1W-LCB01
Loop Control Board, the CS1W-LCB05 Loop Control Board, the [email protected]@P Process-control CPU
Units, and the [email protected]@P Loop-control CPU Units.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to install and operate the CX-Process Monitor Plus. Please read the following manuals
carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before setting up or using an application
for a Loop Control Unit or Loop Control Board.
Product
WS02-LCMC1-EV2
Manual name
CX-Process Monitor
Plus Operation Manual
WS02-LCTC1-EV5
CX-Process Tool
CX-Process Tool
Operation Manual
CS1W-LC001
Loop Control Unit
Loop Control Unit
Operation Manual
Loop Control Boards
CS1W-LCB01/05
Loop Control Boards, Operation Manual
[email protected]@P
Process-control CPU
Units, and
[email protected]@P
Loop-control CPU
Units
CS1W-LC001
Loop Control Unit
Loop Control Unit
Function Block Reference Manual
Loop Control Boards
CS1W-LCB01/05
Loop Control Boards, Function Block Reference Manual
[email protected]@P
Process-control CPU
Units, and
[email protected]@P
Loop-control CPU
Units
Cat. No.
Contents
W428
Installation and operation procedures for the
(this manual) CX-Process Monitor Plus.
W372
Installation and operation procedures for the
CX-Process Tool.
W374
Installation and operation procedures for the
Loop Control Unit (except for function blocks).
W406
Installation and operation procedures for the
Loop Control Boards (except for function
blocks).
W375
Detailed information on function blocks for
Loop Control Units.
W407
Detailed information on function blocks for
Loop Control Boards.
Section 1 introduces the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Section 2 describes installing the CX-Process Monitor Plus and connections to the PLC.
Section 3 described data exchange for the CX-Process Monitor Plus
Section 4 describes the monitor screens used with the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Section 5 describes the procedures to create screens and monitor using the CX-Process Monitor
Plus.
Section 6 describes errors that can occur while using the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
The Appendix provides a list of ITEM settings for function blocks.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
ix
x
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the CX-Process
Monitor Plus. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
1
2
3
4
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
xii
xii
xiv
xi
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent) and
knowledge about instrumentation system.
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, petrochemical plants, and other systems,
machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and
property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can
directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PC System to the above-mentioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Check the following items before starting Loop Control Unit operation:
Analog I/O Units used in combination with the Loop Control Unit must be
mounted correctly, and the unit number set on the front panel of the Analog
I/O Unit must be the same as the unit number set on the Field Terminal Function Block. If the unit numbers are not the same, I/O (read/write) will be performed on the data for another Special I/O Unit (i.e., the one whose unit
number is set in the Field Terminal Function Block).
The initial settings of the System Common Block on the Loop Control Unit
must be set correctly. In particular, make sure that the Data Memory for the
Node Terminals in the CPU Unit controlling the Loop Control Unit is not used
for other applications on the PC. If the same words in Data Memory are used
for more than one application, the PC system may act unexpectedly and
cause injury.
xii
3
Safety Precautions
When writing data to the I/O memory in the CPU Unit with function blocks
(e.g., using Send All Blocks, Expanded DO/AO Terminal to CPU Unit, or DO/
AO Terminal to CPU Unit), be sure that the words written to in the I/O memory
are not being used for any other purpose. If I/O memory words are allocated
to more than one purpose, the PC system may act unexpectedly and cause
injury.
!WARNING Check the following items before starting to run the Loop Control Board:
• Do not allow the bank of the EM Area with the number specified for allocation to the HMI (human-machine interface) data to be used by the CPU
Unit or other Units for any other purpose. The bank allocated for the HMI
is specified in ITEM 050 (EM Area Bank Allocated for HMI Memory = 0 to
12) of the System Common block. If the same memory area is used for
more than one purpose, the system may operate in an unexpected fashion, which may result in injury.
• Do not allow the area to which user link table data is written to be used by
the CPU Unit or other Units for any other purpose. If the same memory
area is used for more than one purpose, the system may operate in an
unexpected fashion, which may result in injury.
• Analog Input/Output Units used in combination with the Loop Control
Board must be mounted correctly, and the unit number set on the front
panel of the Analog Input/Output Unit must match the unit number set on
the Field Terminal block. If the unit numbers do not match, input/output
(read/write) will be performed on the data of another Special I/O Unit (i.e.,
the one whose unit number is set on the Field Terminal block).
• The defaults of the System Common block on the Loop Control Board
must be set correctly.
!WARNING Always stop the operation of the Loop Control Board before converting any of
the EM Area to file memory. If any part of the EM Area that is being used by
the Loop Control Board for the HMI is converted to file memory during Board
operation, the system may operate in an unexpected fashion, which may
result in injury.
!WARNING Do not perform processing in such a way that the Loop Control Unit/Board
and CPU Unit write to identical I/O memory words allocated to a contact output or analog output of an external Unit. If the same words are written to, the
externally connected loads may act unexpectedly and cause injury.
!WARNING Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
!Caution Before transferring function block data (initial setting data or operation data) to
the Loop Control Unit/Board, confirm that the destination for the data is correct and also confirm the overall safety of the system (including the Loop Control Unit/Board). Not doing so may result in unexpected operation.
xiii
4
Application Precautions
!Caution After updating the tag settings or network configuration for CX-Process Monitor Plus, always confirm that the Monitor Plus screens will operate properly
with the new settings or configuration before attempting actual operation. If
the settings or configuration is not appropriate, unexpected operation may
result.
4
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using CX-Process Monitor Plus.
!Caution Loop Control Unit/Board data is monitored and operated using CX-Process
Monitor Plus based on the tag files for Monitor Plus created using CX-Process
Tool. CX-Process Tool can be used on Microsoft Windows 95, 98, Me, 2000,
or NT (Service Pack 4 or later). CX-Process Tool Ver. 3.2 or higher must be
used to output tag files for the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
!Caution Before using function block data in actual operation, confirm operation by
monitoring run status (to check the load rate; select Execute/Operation/Monitor Run Status) and validating actions (select Validate Action/Start) with
CX-Process Tool. In particular, be sure to confirm that the load rate will be
less than 60%. (For details on the load rate, refer to the Loop Control Unit/
Board Operation Manual.)
!Caution The Loop Control Unit/Board can read and write I/O memory in the CPU Unit
using the Field Terminal Function Blocks or CPU Terminal Blocks independent of the user program (Step Ladder Program) in the CPU Unit. Do not write
to the same I/O memory words from both the Loop Control Unit/Board and the
CPU Unit.
!Caution To hold an analog output or contact output at a specific value (for example, the
maximum value or minimum value) when the Loop Control Unit/Board stops
running, create a Step Ladder Program in the CPU Unit so that the corresponding output bit allocated to Analog Output Unit or Contact Output Unit is
set to the desired value using an NC condition of the Loop Control Unit/Board
Running Flag (bit 00 in allocated CIO word “n”) as an input condition.
!Caution If a fatal error occurs in the CPU Unit (including fatal errors created by execution of an FALS instruction), the Loop Control Unit/Board will also stop running. To hold analog outputs to the previous values before the stop occurred,
and to set analog outputs to either the minimum value or maximum value, use
the output hold function of the Analog Output Unit or Analog I/O Unit.
!Caution Before turning ON the power to the PC, make sure that the facilities are safe.
The analog output values and contact outputs from the Loop Control Unit/
Board are updated when the power to the PC is turned ON regardless of the
operating mode of the CPU Unit (including in the PROGRAM mode). (Internally, the analog output values and contact outputs are sent from the CPU
Unit to Basic I/O Units and Analog Output Units.)
!Caution Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
xiv
4
Application Precautions
!Caution Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any
of the following:
• Changing the operating mode of the PC (including the setting of the Startup Mode)
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory
• Changing the present value or any set value in memory
!Caution Be sure that all mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector
screws are tightened to the torque specified in the user manuals. Incorrect
tightening torque may result in malfunction.
!Caution In the event of system or power failure, CX-Process function files (extension
“.ist”) may not be saved. It is recommended that function files are saved regularly.
!Caution If the power supply is turned OFF while function block data is being backed up
from RAM to flash memory, the backup will not be completed normally. If the
power supply is turned back ON within 24 hours, however, the super capacitor
will have held the RAM data. The backup operation will restart when power is
turned ON and operation will start when the backup has been completed. If
the power supply is turned OFF for more than 24 hours, however, RAM data
will be lost and operation will be started with the data that was previously
saved to flash memory. If this happens, the Cold Start Auto-execution Flag
(A35807) will turn ON to show that the previous data has been used. Use this
bit in programming to take whatever steps are necessary, such as downloading the most recent function block data.
xv
Application Precautions
xvi
4
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section introduces the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
1-1
1-2
CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-1
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-2
Screen Outlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1-1-3
CX-Process Monitor Plus System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1-1-4
Relationship to CX-Process Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
1-1-5
Relation between Screens and Function Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
1-1-6
CX-Process Monitor Plus Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
1-1-7
CX-Process Monitor Plus Setting and Monitoring Capabilities. . . .
20
1-1-8
Files Created Using CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
1-1-9
Version Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
Basic Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
1
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
1-1
1-1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Outline
The CX-Process Monitor Plus is an application that runs on Windows 2000,
XP, or Vista. It is used to monitor the Function Block data within a Loop Control Unit/Board using Control screens (on-site instrument images), Trend
screens, Graphic screens, and Annunciator screens, etc., via the Controller
Link, serial communications, or Ethernet. The CX-Process Monitor Plus is
used together with the CX-Process Tool to create function blocks for Loop
Control Units/Boards.
You can also perform the following four functions.
Monitoring Function
Blocks in a Loop Control
Unit/Board
Monitor PV, SP, and MV, etc., within the Control Block, monitor analog signals,
and monitor contact signals.
Perform Run/Stop instructions in the Loop Control Unit/Board.
Display the status of the CPU Unit, such as the current operating mode.
Controlling Function
Blocks in a Loop Control
Unit/Board
Change settings, switch between auto and manual, and perform manual operations, tune PID constants, etc., in the Control Block.
Monitoring Function Block
Alarm Status in a Loop
Control Unit/Board
Display Control Block and Alarm Block alarms if they occur, and store the
alarms in the alarm history.
Configuring CX-Process
Monitor Plus Screens
You can configure the screen to suit your needs.
2
You can perform stop block operation commands for each Control Block
(when using the Tuning screen).
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
CX-Process Monitor Plus Functions
--User-defined
screens
Screen
Monitoring operating
status
--OK (Display PV bar)
Overview
Control
--OK (Change SP, switch
between auto/manual,
and perform manual operations)
OK (Display PV, SP, and OK (Change SP, and
MV trends for 1 loop)
change P, I, D, etc.)
OK (Display Control Block --or analog signal trends)
OK (Display Control Block --or analog signal trends)
OK (Display Segment
OK (Run/stop operation
Program 2 trends)
at the relevant Segment
Program 2 Block)
OK (Display status for
OK (Turn ON/OFF the
contact or analog signal
contact, and set the anagraphics)
log value)
-----
Tuning
Trend
Batch Trend
Segment
Program 2
Graphic
Annunciator
System screens
Operation Guide OK (Display message
when Internal Switch is
turned ON)
System Monitor OK (Display the run/stop
status for the Loop Control Unit/Board, display
Execution errors, RAM
checksum errors, and
battery errors, and monitor the status of the CPU
Unit control mode, etc.)
Alarm Log
--Operation Log
---
System Monitor
Log
OK (Displays run/stop
command history and
Execution error history
when an error occurs)
Note
Controlling operation
---
Monitoring alarm status
OK
OK
OK (Change bar graph
colors)
OK
--OK (Errors related to the
relevant Segment Program 2 Block)
OK
OK (Use colors or sound
to notify of an alarm)
OK
OK (Run/stop command
for the Loop Control Unit/
Board)
OK
---
OK (Stored when an
alarm occurs)
OK
OK (Stores run operation
history, e.g., SP change,
etc.)
---
OK
Only the following data can be monitored and set with the CX-Process Monitor Plus and tag names must be set to enable monitoring and setting. Use CXProcess Tool Ver. 3.2 or higher to set the tag names.
3
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Data set/monitored
by CX-Process
Monitor Plus
Function block data
Contact signals
Analog
signals
1-1-2
Loop Control Board
Control Blocks:
Basic PID (Block Model 011), Advanced PID (Block Model
012), Blended PID (Block Model 013), Batch Flowrate Capture (Block Model 014), Indication and Setting (Block Model
031), Indication and Operation (Block Model 032), Ratio
Setting (Block Model 033), Indicator (Block Model 034), 2position ON/OFF (Block Model 001), and 3-position ON/
OFF (Block Model 002)
Operation Blocks:
High/Low Alarm (Block Model 111), Segment Program 2
(Block Model 157), ON/OFF Valve Manipulator (Block
Model 221), Motor Manipulator (Block Model 222), Reversible Motor Manipulator (Block Model 223), Motor Opening
Manipulator (Block Model 224), Timer (Block Model 205)
and Counter (Block Model 208)
Contact signals through Contact Distributor (Block Model
201) + Internal Switch (Block Model 209)
Analog signals through Input Selector (Block Model 162)
Sent to
Monitor Plus
Set from
Analog signals through Constant Generator (Block Model
Monitor Plus 166)
Screen Outlines
Overview Screen
4
Loop Control Unit
Possesses the functions of all menu screens and alarm display screens.
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Control Screens
Monitor and set the Control Block and part of the Operation Block, monitor
analog signals, and monitor and set contact signals.
Tuning Screens
Use this screen to change Control Block P, I, D constants.
5
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Section 1-1
Trend Screens
Display as an image changes due to the passage to time of the Control Block
PV, SP, MV, or other analog signals.
Batch Trend Screens
Display a recorder image of the changes over time of the Control Block PV,
SP, MV, or other analog signals. Trend sampling is started and ended with tag
data (digital or analog) as the trigger.
6
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Segment Program 2
Screens
Display a recorder image of PV trends for Segment Program 2 (Block Model
157) set values. Segments can be set in table format while observing a time
axis graph.
Graphic Screens
Use the screen to display the device status as a schematic.
7
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Section 1-1
Annunciator Screens
Use this screen to display comprehensively the status (mainly the alarm status) of the contacts.
Operation Guide Screens
Use this screen to display registered messages when the contact signal is
ON.
8
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Alarm Log Screens
Use this screen to display the alarm history.
Operation Log Screens
Use this screen to display the operation history.
9
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
System Monitor Screens
Use this screen to display the system status, and run/stop the Loop Control
Unit/Board.
System Monitor Log
Screens
Use this screen to display the run/stop history and Execution error history, and
to record the time at which they occurred.
1-1-3
CX-Process Monitor Plus System Requirements
FinsGateway
As shown below, the CX-Process Monitor Plus uses the communications
driver FinsGateway (Embedded version) to communicate with the PLC (Programmable Controller) mounted to the Loop Control Unit/Board.
CX-Process Tool
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Software
FinsGateway (Embedded version)
Hardware
10
RS-232C port
Controller Link
Support Board
Ethernet board
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
You can use any one of the FinsGateway (Embedded version) given below.
• Serial Unit driver
• Controller Link driver
• CLK (PCI) driver
• ETN_UNIT driver
Note
1. You cannot start CX-Process Monitor Plus if FinsGateway (Embedded version) is not installed.
2. CX-Process (Monitor Plus and Tool) cannot use FinsGateway Version 1 as
a communications driver. Be sure to use Version 3 or later.
3. If CX-Programmer, CX-Protocol, CX-Motion, or other Support Software
(i.e., CX-Server communications software), or applications that use special serial drivers, are connected online, they use the same COM port, so
CX-Process (Monitor Plus and Tool) cannot connect online (i.e., initialize
serial communications) using the Host link (SYSWAY). First disconnect offline other Support Software or applications that use special serial drivers,
before reconnecting online (i.e., initializing serial communications) CXProcess. Conversely, while CX-Process is connected online (i.e., initializing serial communications), other Support Software that communicate using CX-Server cannot connect online.
4. You cannot install CX-Process and FinsGateway Version 1 on the same
IBM PC/AT or compatible.
5. Both FinsGateway Version 3 and Version 2003 (Embedded version) are
bundled with the CX-Process Monitor Plus software.
When using FinsGateway for the communications driver, install one of
these versions. The FinsGateway Runtime Version can also be used. If the
runtime version is already installed, it is not necessary to install the embedded version.
Set Network Address,
Node Address, and Unit
Address.
Note
The network address, node address, and unit address for communications
between the CX-Process Monitor Plus and PLC are set using the CX-Process
Tool address settings (Settings/Network Settings).
The CX-Process Monitor and CX-Process Monitor Plus use FinsGateway as
the communications driver for connections with the PLC. When using the CXProcess Monitor or CX-Process Monitor Plus, always set FinsGateway as the
communications driver for the CX-Process Tool. If the CX-Server is set, the
CX-Process Monitor or CX-Process Monitor Plus will not be able to go online
with the PLC.
11
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Register the Function
Blocks to Exchange Data
with the CX-Process
Monitor Plus.
Register and connect the function blocks to exchange data with the CX-Process Monitor Plus. The following function blocks can be used depending on
the items to be monitored.
Items to
monitor
Function
block data
Registrations and
connections
Only register the function blocks.
Contact
signals
Analog
signals
Register and connect
the function blocks.
Register and connect
the function blocks.
Loop Control Unit
Loop Control Board
Send All Blocks block (Block Model 462) HMI settings in the System Common
block (Block Mode 000)
and Receive All Blocks block (Block
Model 461)
Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) or Internal Switch (Block Model 209)
Input Selector block (Block Model 162) and Constant Generator block (Block Model
166)
Block to input analog signals from
the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Main function blocks
Block to output analog signals to
the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Blocks to monitor function
block ITEM tags from the
CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Blocks to manipulate or display contacts
from the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Set CSV Tags and Tags for
CX-Process Monitor Plus.
The CX-Process Monitor Plus uses tags set from the CX-Process Tool (Ver.
3.2 or higher) to read and write data in Loop Control Units/Boards. To use the
CX-Process Monitor Plus, therefore, CSV tags and tags for the CX-Process
Monitor Plus must be set.
Loop Control Units
1,2,3...
1. Register the Send All Blocks block (Block Model 642) and Receive All
Blocks block (Block Model 641).
2. Set tags as follows:
• Function block data: Set CSV tags.
• Individual contact signals: Set tags for Monitor Plus for the contacts in the
Internal Switch block (Block Model 209).
• Individual analog signals from LCU to computer: Set tags for Monitor Plus
for the analog signals in the Input Selection block (Block Model 162).
• Individual analog signals from computer to LCU: Set tags for Monitor Plus
for the analog signals in the Constant Generator block (Block Model 166).
12
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Loop Control Boards
1,2,3...
1. Make the settings for the HMI in the System Common block (Block Model
000).
2. Set tags as follows:
• Function block data: Set CSV tags.
• Individual contact signals: Set tags for Monitor Plus for the contacts in the
Internal Switch block (Block Model 209).
• Individual analog signals from LCU to computer: Set tags for Monitor Plus
for the analog signals in the Input Selection block (Block Model 162).
• Individual analog signals from computer to LCU: Set tags for Monitor Plus
for the analog signals in the Constant Generator block (Block Model 166).
Note
For both the Loop Control Unit and Loop Control Board, the following function blocks must be created and connected separately to
enable monitoring and setting individual contact signals and individual analog signals (i.e., other than function block data).
• To monitor and set individual contact signals, contact signals must be
input/output using the Contact Distributor block (Block Model 201) and
Internal Switch block (Block Model 209).
• To monitor individual analog signals, analog signals must be output
from the Input Selection block (Block Model 162).
• To set individual analog signals, analog signals must be input to the
Constant Generator block (Block Model 166).
Compile the Tag File for
the CX-Process Monitor
Plus.
Note
The tag file for Monitor Plus must be compiled (Execute – Create Tag File –
Monitor Plus Tag).
The following dialog box will be displayed if a tag file for Monitor Plus is output
while the CX-Process Monitor Plus is running.
Tag information will not be updated if a tag file for Monitor Plus is output during CX-Process Monitor Plus operation. To update the tag file, restart the CXProcess Monitor Plus.
Download Function Block
Data to the Loop Control
Unit/Board.
Download the function blocks.
Compile the Monitor Tag
Files.
Start the CX-Process Monitor Plus. In the Main Window, click the Run Button
or the Setup Button. The monitor tag files (mtagmst and mtagsubmst) will be
automatically generated based on the tag file for Monitor Plus (monitor.csv).
13
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
1-1-4
Relationship to CX-Process Tool
Tag Names
As shown earlier in CX-Process Monitor Plus Conditions of Use, if monitoring
or operating Function Blocks using CX-Process Monitor Plus, you must first
perform the following steps using CX-Process Tool.
1,2,3...
1. Set the network address, node address, and unit address.
2. Register the blocks for which data is to be exchanged with the CX-Process
Monitor Plus.
3. Set the CSV tags and tags for Monitor Plus.
4. Generate the tag file for Monitor Plus.
5. Download the function block data to the Loop Control Unit/Board.
6. Compile the monitor tag file.
CX-Process Monitor Plus handles all items allocated tag names as one string.
CX-Process Monitor Plus does not differentiate which Function Block was
used to specify the tag names.
ITEM Settings
Function block ITEMs are set as shown in the following table. The CX-Process
Tool is normally used to set initial data S and the CX-Process Monitor Plus is
normally used to set operation data O.
CX-Process Tool
Type
data classification
Initial settings
S
Operation data
O
ITEM
Example: PID Block
Initial setting parameter
for each function block
Forward/Reverse direction,
SP setting method, compensation method, etc.
Example: PID Block SP,
alarm settings, PID constants, etc.
Operation parameters
for each function block
Note
CX-Process CX-Process
Tool
Monitor Plus
Set
Cannot be set
Set in special Set
cases
Initial settings O and operation data S classifications are displayed on ITEM
Setting Screens of the CX-Process Tool. For details on the ITEMs set each
function block, refer to the Function Block Reference Manual.
Example
ITEM type ITEM
Parameter 004
Parameter 008
012
Parameter 023
024
Note
14
Contents
R: Read, W: Write,
R/W: Read/write,
---: R/W disabled
r, t/w: CX-Process Tool
operation monitor/Operation
monitor read and write
(S): Initial setting,
(O): Operation data
CX-Process
CX-Process
Tool
Monitor Plus
Operation cycle (s)
R/W (S)
--High/Low alarm
R/W (O)
R/W
Hysteresis set value
R/W (S)
--Local SP set value
R/W (O)
R/W
SP set method (Initial setting) R/W (S)
R
0: Local, 1: Remote/Local
Analog values are normally set with the CX-Process Monitor Plus. They can
be set with the CX-Process Tool provided that they are in percentage increments between 0% and 100%. Scaling engineering units cannot be set with
the CX-Process Tool.
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
1-1-5
Relation between Screens and Function Blocks
The relation between screens and function blocks is shown below.
Screen
UserOverview
defined Screen
screens Control
Screens
Tuning
Screens
Trend
Screens
Batch Trend
Screen
Segment
Program 2
Screen
Loop Control Unit: Register Send All
Input Selector Internal Switch
Constant
Blocks and Receive All Blocks blocks
block (Block
block (Block
Generator
Model 162)
Model 209)
block (Block
Loop Control Boards: Make HMI settings
Model 166)
in the System Common block
--------Basic PID, Advanced PID, Blended PID
(Block Model 013), Batch Flowrate Capture
(Block Model 014), Indication and Setting,
Indication and Operation, Ratio Setting,
Indicator, 2-Position ON/OFF, 3-Position
ON/OFF, High/Low Alarm, Segment Program 2, ON/OFF Valve Manipulator, Motor
Manipulator, Reversible Motor Manipulator,
Motor Opening Manipulator, Timer, Counter
Segment Program 2
Contact signal
Analog signal
or analog value or contact
parameters
parameters
Analog output
---
---
Basic PID, Advanced PID, Blended PID
(Block Model 013), Batch Flowrate Capture
(Block Model 014), Indication and Setting,
Indication and Operation, Ratio Setting,
Indicator, 2-Position ON/OFF, 3-Position
ON/OFF (PV, SP, MV only), Segment Program 2, ON/OFF Valve Manipulator, Motor
Manipulator, Reversible Motor Manipulator,
Motor Opening Manipulator
Segment Program 2
Analog signal
Contact signal
or analog value or contact
parameters
parameters
Analog output
Can be designated as
expansion measurement tags
Contact signal
or contact
parameters
Contact signal
or contact
parameters
Contact signal
or contact
parameters
---
Can be designated as
expansion measurement tags
Analog output
---
---
---
Graphic
Screens
Same tag ITEMs as for Control screens.
Annunciator
Screens
Same tag ITEMs as for Control screens.
Can be designated as
expansion measurement tags
Analog signal
or analog value
parameters
---
---
---
---
---
Contacts for which alarms were automatically allocated when registering tags
---
---
---
Contacts for
which alarms
were automatically allocated
when registering tags
---
---
---
---
Operation
Guide
Screens
System
Monitor
Screens
System Alarm Log
screens Screens
Operation
History
Screens
System
Monitor Log
Screens
---
---
---
---
15
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
1-1-6
CX-Process Monitor Plus Software Specifications
CX-Process Monitor Plus Specifications
Item
Product name
Model
Applicable PLC-series
Applicable Unit
Applicable
computer
Personal computer
CPU
OS
Memory
Hard disk drive
Monitor
CD-ROM drive
Mouse
Printer
Sound board
Required software
Connecting Connection with CPU Unit
method
(or Serial Communications
Board/Unit)
Connection via Controller
Link
Connection via Ethernet
Loop Control Unit/Board data specification method
Offline operation functions
16
Descriptions
CX-Process Monitor Plus
WS02-LCMC1-EV2
CS/CJ-series
Loop Control Unit Ver. 2.0 or later
Loop Control Board
Process-control CPU Unit
Loop-control CPU Unit
IBM PC/AT or compatible
Min. required: Pentium MMX233 MHz or faster, Recommended: Celeron
400 MHz or faster
Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or higher), Windows XP Professional, Windows Vista Ultimate, or Windows Vista Business (Operation is not
supported on Windows 95, 98, NT, or ME.)
Min. required: 128 Mbytes, Recommended: 256 Mbytes or more
Min. required: 650 Mbytes of free space, Recommended: 800 Mbytes or more
of free space
Min. required: XGA, Recommended: XGA or higher, min. 1024 × 768 dots, 256
colors
At least one
Recommended: Microsoft mouse or compatible pointing device
Any printer supported by Microsoft Windows
1 board
FinsGateway (One of the following must be installed according to the communications method with the PLC.)
Serial Unit driver (Host Link)
Controller Link driver (Controller Link)
CLK (PCI) driver (Controller Link, PCI bus)
ETN_UNIT driver (Ethernet)
Using FinsThe computer is connected to the CPU Unit peripheral ports or
Gateway
integrated RS-232C port, or RS-232C port of the Serial ComSerial Unit
munications Unit. (Only a 1:1 connection is possible.)
version
– Connector cable:
When connecting to the CPU Unit peripheral ports: Model
[email protected]@@ (2 m, 6 m)
When connecting to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port: Model
[email protected]@@[email protected] (2 m, 5 m)
– Communications protocol with PLC: Host Link (not supported
on Peripheral bus)
Install the driver in a computer equipped with a Controller Link
Using FinsGateway CLK Support Board (PCI slot) to support communications between
the computer and PLCs equipped with a Controller Link Unit.
(PCI) Driver
Using FinsInstall the driver in a computer equipped with a Controller Link
Gateway
Support Board (ISA slot) to support communications between
Controller
the computer and PLCs equipped with a Controller Link Unit.
Link driver
Using FinsInstall the FinsGateway ETN_UNIT driver on the computer on
Gateway
which an Ethernet board is mounted to enable to enable comETN_UNIT
munications with the PLC on which the Ethernet Unit is
driver
mounted.
CSV tags and tags for Monitor Plus (CSV monitor tags) are set using the CXProcess Tool. These tags are used to specify Loop Control Unit/Board data.
Prepare user configuration screens for use in the online operation screen.
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Item
Online
operation
functions
Descriptions
User Config- Overview
uration
screen
screen
Control
screen
Tuning
screen
Trend
screen
Place buttons for progressing to the Control screen, Trend screen and other
screens. 4 columns and 8 lines are displayed on each screen (max. 32
screens).
Control blocks such as the PID blocks and Indication blocks, and some Operation blocks are displayed for up to 8 loops in a single screen in the form of a
field device. The maximum number of screens is 400.
This screen displays the Set Point, PV and MV numeric values, displays PV as
a bar graph, and can be used for changing Set Point, MAN and other setting
values. The color of bar graphs changes when an alarm occurs.
You can progress to the Tuning screen from the Control screen.
Fine tuning according to the degree specified by the user is possible for PID
constants.
This screen is for setting P, I, D parameters in Control blocks such as the PID
blocks, and for setting alarm setting values. PV, Set Point and MV can be tuned
while their trends are monitored. The maximum number of screens is 3200.
Run stop/stop cancellation are possible on each function block.
Note
Only the Control block that is designated as the source at the 1-Block
Send Terminal to Computer block can be registered.
The analog signals output from each function block tag ITEM are collected at
fixed intervals and saved to a file. If necessary, up to 8 analog signals can be
displayed on one screen in the form of a multi-dot recorder.
Data can be saved in CSV
Data collected
Real time trend
(logger function)
format either using button
10, 20, 50, 100, or 300
hours of data is saved at 1, commands, or automati2, 5, 10, or 30-second inter- cally at a set interval (every
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 18,
vals for up to 480 tags.
20, 24, 48, 72, 96, 120, or
Historic trend
240 hours)
30, 150, 300, 900, or 1,800
days of data is saved at 1,
5, 10, 30, or 60-minute
intervals for up to 960 tags.
Data display
Horizontal (time) axis: 2, 4, 8, 12 and 24 hour time units
can be scrolled
Vertical (8-point common) axis: Graduation can be
enlarged by a factor or 1,
2, 5 and 10.
Data is displayed from the time when the specified display
start time is reached.
Display color: red, yellow, green, blue, magenta, purple,
cyan, white
17
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Item
Online
operation
functions
Descriptions
User Config- Batch Trend
uration
Screen
screen
Segment
Program 2
Screen
18
The analog signals output from each function block tag ITEM are collected at
fixed intervals when tag data conditions are satisfied, and the data is automatically saved. Data can be displayed in combination with past data.
Data collection
Four hours or ten days of
Data can be manually
data is saved at 1-second
saved in CSV format by butor 1-minute intervals for up ton operations or automatito 960 tags.
cally saved at the
completion of each batch.
Past data can be automatically saved in binary format.
Data display
Horizontal (time) axis: The following time units can be
scrolled.
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24, 36, 48, and
72 hours; 7 or 10 days
Vertical (8-point common) axis: Gradation can be
enlarged by a factor of
1, 2, 5, or 10.
When a display start time is specified, data is displayed
from that time.Display color: Red, yellow, green, blue,
magenta, purple, cyan, white
Displays PV trends for Segment Program 2 (Block Model 157) set values. Segments can be set in table format while observing a time axis graph.
Data collection
3, 30, or 180 days of data is Data can be manually
saved at 1-, 10-, or 60-sec- saved in CSV format by butond intervals.
ton operations or automatically saved with each batch
completion.
Past data can be automatically saved in binary format.
Data display
Horizontal (time) axis: 2, 4, 8, 12, 24, 72 hour time increments can be scrolled.
Vertical axis: Gradation can be enlarged by a factor of
1, 2, 5, or 10.
When a display start time is specified, data is displayed
from that time.
Display color: Yellow, light blue, green, purple
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
Item
Online
operation
functions
Descriptions
User Config- Graphic
uration
screen
screen
Annunciator
screen
Operation
Guide
Screen
System
Alarm Log
Fixed screen screen
Operation
Log screen
System
Monitor
screen
System
Monitor Log
screen
Graphic elements representing plant process control can be pasted to Graphic
Screens from a library. These elements can be used to display changes in
plant status. Up to 200 Graphic Screens can be created.
• Library Figures and Image Elements
Text displays, straight lines, rectangles, rectangle with round corners,
ellipses, polygons, images
• Library Functional Objects
• Fixed Graphic Display Elements:
Text, instruments, thermometers, transmitters, orifices
• Changeable Graphic Display Elements:
Analog displays: Bar graph displays, numeric displays, tanks
Analog settings: Numerical settings
Contact display: Pumps, valves, pipes
Contact operation: Switches
• Elements for Screen Display:
Screen jump elements
FP switch (faceplate popup) elements
• Individual graphic screens can be saved as files or read.
• Multiple graphic elements can be grouped and saved as files or read.
This screen notifies the operator of alarms or errors that occur by changing the
display color and emitting sound. At the same time, a 32-character message is
displayed over two lines on screen elements.
A total of 16 screen elements (4 columns × 4 lines) can be displayed on each
screen. The maximum number of screens is 5.
This screen displays pre-registered 128-character messages over two lines
together with the date of occurrence when the specified internal switch is set to
ON.
Max. number of registerable messages: 1000, Number of display colors: 16
Up to 1000 messages are displayed in a single screen.
Output possible in CSV format.
A record of alarms (time of error occurrence, tag name, PV or MV current
value at occurrence, alarm type, etc.) that occur and that are input from the
Control and Alarm blocks is saved and displayed as a list later.
Up to 1000 alarm messages are displayed in a single screen.
Output possible in CSV format.
A record of operations using graphic screen data and switch objects and
changes made to ITEM data in the Loop Control Unit/Board in the Control or
Tuning Screen can be saved and later displayed as an operation log. The operation log includes the date and time of change, tag name, original ITEM data
setting, new ITEM data setting, etc.
Up to 1000 operation messages are displayed in a single screen.
Output possible in CSV format.
This screen displays the Loop Control Unit/Board system error information.
This screen displays a log of the run/stop history and a history of execution
errors that occur on the Loop Control Unit/Board together with the date of
occurrence.
Output possible in CSV format.
The Loop Control Unit/Board does not itself have HMI functionality. To monitor
function block operation status, it is thus necessary to connect and use the
CX-Process Monitor Plus.
19
Section 1-1
CX-Process Monitor Plus
1-1-7
CX-Process Monitor Plus Setting and Monitoring Capabilities
The data that can be set and monitored using the CX-Process Monitor Plus is
listed in the following table.
Item
Function block data
Contact signals
Loop Control Unit
Loop Control Board
Control Blocks:
Basic PID (Block Model 011), Advanced PID (Block Model
012), Blended PID (Block Model 013), Batch Flowrate Capture
(Block Model 014), Indication and Setting (Block Model 031),
Indication and Operation (Block Model 032), Ratio Setting
(Block Model 033), Indicator (Block Model 034), 2-position
ON/OFF (Block Model 001), and 3-position ON/OFF (Block
Model 002)
Operation Blocks:
High/Low Alarm (Block Model 111), Segment Program 2
(Block Model 157), ON/OFF Valve Manipulator (Block Model
221), Motor Manipulator (Block Model 222), Reversible Motor
Manipulator (Block Model 223), Motor Opening Manipulator
(Block Model 224), Timer (Block Model 205) and Counter
(Block Model 208)
Contact signals through Contact Distributor (Block Model 201)
+ Internal Switch (Block Model 209)
Analog signals through Input Selector (Block Model 162)
Analog Sent to
signals Monitor Plus
Set from
Analog signals through Constant Generator (Block Model 166)
Monitor Plus
The following items must be set in advance using the CX-Process Tool.
Item
1. Register the function Function block data
blocks used for data
exchange
exchange.
Contact signal data
exchange
Analog signal data
exchange
2. Set the tag names.
3. Create the monitor tag file.
Note
20
Loop Control Unit
Loop Control Board
Receive All Blocks (Block Model HMI functions in the System
461) and Send All Blocks (Block Common block (Block Model
Model 462)
000)
Contact Distributor block (Block Model 201) + Internal Switch block
(Block Model 209)
Input Selector block (Block Model 162) and Constant Generator
block (Block Model 166)
Function Block Data:
CSV tags are set in the CX-Process Tool by selecting the function
blocks and then selected Settings – Tag Setting – CSV Tags.
Contact Signals:
tags for Monitor Plus are set for each contact in the Internal Switch
blocks. The function blocks are then selected, the right mouse button
clicked, and Tag Setting – Monitor Plus Tag is selected.
Analog Signals:
tags for Monitor Plus are set for each analog signal in the Variable
ITEM Setting and Constant Generator blocks. The function blocks
are then selected, the right mouse button clicked, and Tag Setting –
Monitor Plus Tag is selected.
Start the CX-Monitor Plus and click the Run or Setup Button.
Using CX-Process Monitor Plus, you can monitor and set only the data given
above to which tag names have been allocated. Also, be sure to use CX-Process Tool to make tag name settings.
Section 1-2
Basic Operating Procedure
1-1-8
Files Created Using CX-Process Monitor Plus
The following data can be created using the CX-Process Monitor Plus
Data type
Graphic screen data
(filename extension: grf)
Object data
(filename extension: itm)
1-1-9
Contents
Graphic screen data, created for each screen.
Grouped object data (functional objects, figures,
images), created when a group file is saved. (Does
not include jump elements or FP switch elements.)
Version Upgrade
The CX-Process Monitor Plus has been upgraded from version 2.0 to version
2.1. The following table lists the contents of the version upgrade.
Item
Supported operating systems
Note
1-2
Previous (version 2.0)
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Workstation
(Service Pack 6a or higher), 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or higher), or
Windows XP Professional (Windows
95, 98, and ME are not supported.)
New (version 2.1)
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
(Service Pack 4 or higher), Windows XP
Professional, Windows Vista Ultimate,
or Windows Vista Business (Windows
95, 98, NT, and ME are not supported.)
The CX-Process Monitor Plus does not support Loop Control Units earlier
than version 2.0.
Basic Operating Procedure
This section explains the procedure up to monitoring using CX-Process Monitor Plus.
1,2,3...
1. Install CX-Process Monitor Plus. (Refer to Section 2 Setup.)
• Install CX-Process Monitor Plus.
2. Make Settings and Transfer Using CX-Process Tool. (Refer to the CX-Process Tool Operation Manual (W372).)
a. Set the network address, node address, and unit address (Settings –
Network).
b.
Register and connect the function blocks that exchange data with the
CX-Process Monitor Plus.
c.
Set the CSV tags and the tags for Monitor Plus.
• CSV tags: Settings – Tag Setting – CSV Tag
• Tags for Monitor Plus: Settings – Tag Setting – Monitor Plus Tag
d. Generate the tag file for Monitor Plus: Execute – Create Tag File –
Monitor Plus Tag
e. Download the function block data to the Loop Control Unit/Board.
f.
Compile the monitor tags. Start the CX-Process Monitor Plus and click
the Setup Button.
g. Enter password.
Note (a) If the above steps are not performed using CX-Process Tool, you
cannot monitor using CX-Process Monitor Plus.
(b) The network address, node address, and unit address settings
made with CX-Process Tool are also used by the CX-Process
Monitor Plus.
3. Configure the Screen Using CX-Process Monitor Plus. (Refer to Section 4
Screen Configuration.)
21
Section 1-2
Basic Operating Procedure
• Design the monitor system using CX-Process Monitor Plus.
• Create and register the Control screens, Trend screens, Graphic screens,
and Annunciator screens on Overview screens.
• When registering, specify on the screen the Loop Control Unit/Board data
by selecting the tags (CSV tags and tags for Monitor Plus) set using CXProcess Tool.
• Set the communications conditions with the PLC using the system monitor setting window (if using serial communications).
Perform the following procedure.
a. Select Omron – CX-Process Monitor Plus – CX-Process Monitor
Plus from the Windows Start Menu.
b.
Click the Setup Button in the Main Window.
c.
Enter password.
d. Click the System Monitor Builder Button in the Setup Dialog Box,
and make settings using the System Monitor Setting Window.
e. Click the Graphic Builder Button in the Setup Dialog Box, create the
Graphic Screen Create Window (including tag name specifications),
and save.
f.
Click the CRT Builder Button in the Setup Dialog Box, and register the
screen using the Builder Window (including Tag name specifications).
g. From the Builder Window Settings menu, select Save, and then click
the OK Button.
4. Check Screen Configuration Using CX-Process Monitor Plus. (Refer to 57 Checking Configurations.)
• Check if you can monitor the Loop Control Unit/Board using the configured screen.
• Start FinsGateway Serial Unit communications according to the communications conditions set using the System monitor setting window by starting the monitor process (communications parameters must be set
manually for FinsGateway, Controller Link, or Ethernet).
Perform the following operation.
a. Click the Setup Button in the Main Window.
b.
Enter password.
c.
In the Setup Dialog Box, click the Run Button (to start the monitoring
process for the configured screen, and to start communications).
d. Select the screens using the Overview Screen, and check that each
function is operating normally.
5. Start the Monitor Operation to monitor the Loop Control Unit/Board. (Refer
to Section SECTION 4 Monitor Screen Functions and Operations for details.)
Perform the following operation.
a. Click the Run Button in the Main Window.
b.
22
Click the screens using the Overview Screen.
SECTION 2
Setup
This section describes installing the CX-Process and connections to the PLC.
2-1
2-2
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
2-1-1
Before Installing FinsGateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
2-1-2
Installing FinsGateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
2-1-3
Uninstalling the CX-Process Monitor/Monitor Plus Version 1 . . . .
33
2-1-4
Installing CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
2-1-5
Converting CX-Process Monitor Plus Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
2-1-6
Converting Data from CX-Process Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
2-1-7
CX-Process Monitor Plus Conversion Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
42
Connecting the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
2-2-1
Connecting via Host Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
2-2-2
Connecting through a Controller Link Support Board . . . . . . . . . . .
45
2-2-3
Connections via Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
23
Section 2-1
Installation
2-1
Installation
Install the CX-Process Monitor Plus using the following procedure.
Install FinsGateway, Embedded Version.
(See sections 2-1-1 and 2-1-2)
Are CX-Process
Monitor and Monitor
Plus Version 1 already
installed?
Yes
Is CX-Process
Monitor and Monitor
Plus Version 1 data to
be used with Monitor
Plus Version 2?
No
New
installation
Update
(Previous data will not
be used.)
Uninstall the CX-Process Monitor
and Monitor Plus Version 1.
(See section 2-1-3)
Yes
What is the version
of the CX-Process
Monitor and Monitor
Plus data?
CX-Process Monitor
Plus Version 1
Convert CX-Process Monitor Plus Version
1 data (See section 2-1-5)
Move the CX-Process Monitor Plus
Version 1 database.
(Screen configuration data
and trend information will
be lost.)
CX-Process Monitor
Convert the CX-Process Monitor data.
(See section 2-1-6.)
Reset to CX-Process Monitor Plus
tags all of the monitor tags set using
the CX-Process Tool.
Move the CX-Process Monitor
database.
Uninstall CX-Process Monitor Plus
Version 1. (See section 2-1-3)
Uninstall the CX-Process Monitor.
(See section 2-1-3.)
Install CX-Process Monitor Plus Version 2. (See section 2-1-4.)
Convert the CX-Process Monitor Plus
Version 1 data. (See section 2-1-5.)
Convert the CX-Process Monitor data.
(See section 2-1-6.)
Convert the CX-Process Monitor Plus
Version 1 database (using the Trend
Database Conversion Utility).
Convert the CX-Process Monitor (using
the Trend Database Conversion Utility).
Copy the data that was converted.
Copy the data that was converted.
Redo the Graphic Screen data settings
(if Graphic Screens are being used).
Redo the Graphic Screen data settings
(if Graphic Screens are being used).
Reallocate the reset tags for CXProcess Monitor Plus Version 2 on the
control and graphic screens.
Note
1. This software must be installed on an computer using Windows 2000, XP,
or Vista as its OS. It will not operate on Windows 95, 98, NT, or Me.
2. Be sure to install FinsGateway Embedded before installing CX-Process
Monitor Plus. You cannot install CX-Process Monitor Plus first.
3. You cannot start CX-Process Monitor Plus if FinsGateway Embedded is
not installed.
4. If connecting CX-Process online using a PLC and Host Link, you cannot
install and use CX-Process on the same computer as FinsGateway Version 1.
24
Section 2-1
Installation
2-1-1
Before Installing FinsGateway
To use the CX-Process Monitor Plus software, the communications driver
(FinsGateway) must be installed in the computer in which the CX-Process
Monitor Plus software is installed.
FinsGateway
Versions
Both FinsGateway Version 3 and Version 2003 (Embedded version) are bundled with the CX-Process Monitor Plus software. When using FinsGateway for
the communications driver, install one of these versions.
The FinsGateWay Runtime version can also be used. If the Runtime version
is already installed, it is not necessary to install the Embedded version.
Selecting the
Communications Driver
The CX-Process Monitor Plus software supports the following communications drivers.
• FinsGateway Ver. 3.12
• FinsGateway Ver. 2003
Select the communications driver to install according to the user's application.
The following tables show the main factors to use in selecting the driver.
OS
Driver
FinsGateway Ver. 3.12
FinsGateway Ver. 2003
Note
Windows 2000
(See note 1.)
Supported
Supported
OS
Windows XP
(See note 2.)
Supported
Supported
Windows Vista
(See note 3.)
Not supported
Supported
1. Supported for CX-Process Monitor Plus only with Windows 2000 Professional and Service Pack 4.
2. Supported for CX-Process Monitor Plus only with Windows XP Professional.
3. Supported for CX-Process Monitor Plus only with Windows Vista Ultimate/
Business.
Communications
Driver
FinsGateway Ver. 3.12
FinsGateway Ver. 2003
Items to Check before
Installing
FinsGateway
Communications method
Toolbus connection
Duplex Ethernet in
computer
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
If a FinsGateway version earlier than Version 2 is already installed:
Start the procedure from Step 1: Backing Up the FinsGateway Settings.
Installing FinsGateway for the First Time:
Start the procedure from Step 4: Internet Explorer Installation.
Steps to Perform before Installing FinsGateway
Step 1: Backing Up the
FinsGateway Settings
If necessary, back up the previous FinsGateway settings, as follows:
Note
If FinsGateway is removed (uninstalled) without backing up the setting data,
the previous setting data will all be lost.
1,2,3...
1. Execute the Backup/Restore FinsGateway Setting Data program on the
CD.
<CD-ROM drive>:\Fgwv3\FgwUtils\SettingSalvage.exe
25
Section 2-1
Installation
2. Select the Backup to File option, and click OK Button.
Step 2: Removing the
Previous
FinsGateway
Remove the previous version of FinsGateway by referring to that manual for
details.
Note
The FinsGateway removal process does not delete all of the FinsGateway
files and registry data used by FinsGateway. As a result, the FinsGateway
reinstallation process sometimes fails. If this happens, execute the following
program from the distribution CD to remove all the files and registry data used
by FinsGateway.
<CD-ROM drive>:\Fgwv3\FgwUtils\FgwRemover3.exe
Step 3: System Restart
After removing FinsGateway, restart the computer. If the following steps are
performed without restarting the computer, the installation will not be completed properly.
Step 4: Internet Explorer
Installation
If Internet Explorer is not already installed, or if the version is old, the FinsGateway installation will display a warning to update it. Update Internet
Explorer.
Internet Explorer is not included with FinsGateway. Refer to the Microsoft
website for details, and install the newest version.
Step 5: Updating the
HTML Help
Runtime
Component
1,2,3...
If the HTML Help runtime component is not already installed, or if the version
is old, the FinsGateway installation will display a warning to update it. Update
the HTML Help runtime component using the following procedure.
If a warning is not displayed, then there is no need to update. The FinsGateway Installer will display the appropriate instructions.
1. Execute the following program from the FinsGateway CD:
<CD-ROM drive>:\Fgwv3\Update\hhupd.exe
2. Update the HTML Help runtime component according to the instructions
displayed on the screen.
3. The program will suggest a system restart when it finishes.
Do not proceed to the next step without restarting the computer. If the installation is continued without restarting the computer, the FinsGateway
will not operate properly.
2-1-2
Installing FinsGateway
Using FinsGateway
Version 3
26
After installing FinsGateway Version 3, install FinsGateway Update 3.12.
Section 2-1
Installation
Installation of FinsGateway Version 3
1,2,3...
1. Select one of the following directories from within the Fgwv3\FGW3ee folder in the CD-ROM. (Select the directory corresponding to the communications method being used in the PLC.)
Folder name
Contents
Clk
Select this directory when connecting the PLC and personal computer (the
CX-Process Tool and the CX-Process Monitor Plus) via Controller Link
using a Controller Link Support Board (ISA bus) installed in the computer.
Clk (PCI)
Select this directory when connecting the PLC and personal computer (the
CX-Process Tool and the CX-Process Monitor Plus) via Controller Link
using a Controller Link Support Board (PCI bus) installed in the computer.
Etn
Select this directory to connect the personal computer (the CX-Process
Tool and the CX-Process Monitor Plus) to the PLC via Ethernet.
Serial
Select this directory to connect the personal computer (the CX-Process
Tool and the CX-Process Monitor Plus) to the PLC via the Host Link.
The following step applies to Host Link SYSWAY connections.
2. Use a program such as Windows Explorer to open the CD-ROM and double-click the following icon to start the Setup.exe file in the CD-ROM's Serial/disk1 directory.
The following screen will be displayed.
27
Installation
Section 2-1
3. Click the Next Button. The User Registration Dialog Box will be displayed.
4. Enter your name and organization, and then click the OK Button. The Note
Dialog Box will be displayed.
5. Click the Yes Button. The Choose Destination Location Dialog Box will be
displayed.
6. Click the Next Button. The Select Program Folder Dialog Box will be displayed.
28
Section 2-1
Installation
7. Check the installation destination is correct, and then click the Next Button.
Installation will start automatically.
When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Finish Button.
Installing FinsGateway
Update 3.12
1,2,3...
1. Use a program such as Windows Explorer to open the CD-ROM and double-click the following icon in the CD-ROM's Fgwv3\FgwUpdate directory.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed.
29
Installation
Section 2-1
3. Click the Next Button. The Select Program Folder Dialog Box will be displayed.
4. Check the installation destination is correct, and then click the Next Button.
The Start Copying Files Dialog Box will be displayed.
5. Check the installation destination is correct, and click the Next Button. Installation will start automatically.
When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Finish Button.
30
Section 2-1
Installation
Using FinsGateway
Version 2003
1,2,3...
1. Open the CD-ROM and double-click the setup.exe file in the CD-ROM's
Fgw2003 folder (Fgw2003\Fgw2003\Disk Images\Embed\setup.exe) to
start the setup program.
The following window will be displayed.
Click the Next Button.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed.
3. Enter the user name and the organization and click the Next Button.
31
Installation
Section 2-1
4. Select the required communications drivers for the CX-Process Monitor
Plus.
As long as there is no problem, select all of them and then click the Next
Button.
5. Specify the destination for the installation.
If there is no need to change the default destination, just click the Next Button.
32
Section 2-1
Installation
6. The following window will be displayed.
Click the Install Button to start the installation.
7. When the installation has been completed, the following dialog box will be
displayed.
Click the Finish Button to restart the computer.
This completes the installation.
2-1-3
Uninstalling the CX-Process Monitor/Monitor Plus Version 1
If the CX-Process Monitor or CX-Process Monitor Plus Version 1 is already
installed on the computer, uninstall it before installing CX-Process Monitor
Plus Version 2. CX-Process Monitor Plus Version 2 cannot be installed on the
same computer as the CX-Process Monitor or CX-Process Monitor Plus Version 1. Use the procedure given below.
Note
The screen configuration data, trend information, and other data will be
deleted when the CX-Process Monitor or Monitor Plus Version 1 is uninstalled. If this data needs to be saved, copy the data from the directory where
33
Section 2-1
Installation
the CX-Process Monitor or CX-Process Monitor Plus Version 1 is installed to a
suitable directory. Refer to 2-1-6 Converting Data from CX-Process Monitor.
• Screen Configuration Data and Trend Data:
If the database path has not been changed from its default, the data will
be saved in one of the following folders.
Copy the folder as is, and back it up.
• CX-Process Monitor Plus:Program Files\Omron\CX-Process Monitor
Plus\DB
• CX-Process Monitor: Program Files\Omron\CX-Process Monitor\DB
If the database path has been changed, the data will not be deleted even
if the application is uninstalled. Save the data if it is needed.
• Graphic Screen Data:
Graphic screen data created by the Graphic Builder is saved in a userspecified folder specified when files were created. The data in this folder
will not be deleted even if the application is uninstalled. Remove the data
manually if it is not required.
1,2,3...
1. Start the tool to add and delete applications from the Windows Control
Panel.
2. Select the CX-Process Monitor or CX-Process Monitor Plus.
3. Click the button to delete the application.
4. Click the OK Button. The application will be uninstalled.
5. When processing has been completed, click the OK Button.
2-1-4
Installing CX-Process Monitor Plus
1,2,3...
1. Insert the CX-Process Monitor Plus installation CD-ROM disk in the CDROM drive.
2. Using a program such as Windows Explorer, select CX-Process Monitor
Plus on the CD-ROM, and then Disk1, and then double-click the Setup.exe icon shown below.
The Preparing Setup Dialog Box will be displayed, and then the Install
Shield Wizard will be displayed. Click the Next Button.
34
Section 2-1
Installation
Note
If the CX-Process Monitor or Monitor Plus Version 1 is already installed on the
computer, the new installation will be aborted and a message will be displayed
prompting you to first uninstall the CX-Process Monitor or Monitor Plus Version 1 program.
Uninstall the CX-Process Monitor or Monitor Plus Version 1 and then again
install the CX-Process Monitor Plus Version 2.
For details on uninstalling CX-Process Monitor and Monitor Plus, refer to 2-13 Uninstalling the CX-Process Monitor/Monitor Plus Version 1.
3. The License Agreement Dialog Box will be displayed.
Carefully read the product license agreement. If you accept all of the terms
of the agreement, select that option and then click the Next Button.
4. The User Information Dialog Box will be displayed.
The user name and organization name registered on the computer are entered by default.
Enter the license number and then click the Next Button.
The license number is written on the software license agreement and user
register that is included with the product.
35
Section 2-1
Installation
5. The Choose Destination Location Dialog Box will be displayed.
Check the installation destination and click the Next Button.
The default directory is C:\Program Files\OMRON\CX-Process Monitor
Plus\
6. The Select Program Folder Dialog Box will be displayed.
Specify the location for adding a new shortcut to the program folder in the
Start Menu, and then click the Next Button.
7. The Choose Destination Location Dialog Box will be displayed.
Check the destination folder and click the Next Button.
36
Section 2-1
Installation
The default folder is C:\OMRON\CX-Process Monitor Plus\DB\.
With Windows 2000 or Windows XP, the Choose Destination Location Dialog
Box will not be displayed. The DB folder will be installed in the following directory: C:\Program Files\OMRON\CX-Process Monitor Plus\DB\.
8. The Ready to Install the Program Dialog Box will be displayed.
Click the Install Button.
The installation will be started by the installation program.
To check or make changes to the installation contents, click the Return
Button.
To abort the installation, click the Cancel Button.
9. When the installation has been completed, the following dialog box will be
displayed. Click the Finish Button.
Note
Windows may have to be restarted after the installation. If required, restart
Windows in response to the Install Shield Wizard message.
10. After the computer has been restarted, a ReadMe file will be displayed.
Note
Be sure to read the ReadMe file before using CX-Process Monitor Plus.
This completes the CX-Process Monitor Plus installation.
37
Section 2-1
Installation
2-1-5
Converting CX-Process Monitor Plus Data
The following procedure must be used to convert data from the CX-Process
Monitor Plus software currently installed in the computer so that it can be
used with the new CX-Process Monitor Plus version.
Check the CX-Process
Monitor Plus version.
Check the version of the CX-Process Monitor Plus program currently installed
on the computer.
Move the CX-Process
Monitor Plus database.
Move the folder where data is saved for the CX-Process Monitor Plus program
currently installed on the computer to a safe location. (See note.)
Note
Convert the CX-Process
Monitor Plus database
(using the Trend DB
Conversion Utility).
1,2,3...
This is the folder set for the database path in the File System Setup. The
default setting for CX-Process Monitor Plus version 2.1 or lower is C:\Program
Files\Omron\CX-Process Monitor Plus\DB.
Use the Trend DB Conversion Utility to convert the trend group definition file
for use with the new version of CX-Process Monitor Plus.
1. Start the Trend DB Conversion Utility. The Trend DB Conversion Utility is
stored at the following location:
CD-ROM drive:\MonitorPlusUpDate\UpDatePlusV2.exe
The following dialog box will be displayed:
2. Click the Browse Button and specify the folder where the CX-Process
Monitor Plus database was moved earlier in this procedure.
3. Click the conversion button corresponding to the CX-Process Monitor Plus
version confirmed earlier in this procedure.
• Monitor Plus version 1.0: Plus version 1.0 format (Version 1.0) → Plus
version 2.1
• Monitor Plus Version 2.0: The Monitor Plus version 2.0 database can
be used for Monitor Plus version 2.1. No change is required.
Note
38
Some data cannot be converted by the Trend DB Conversion Utility. Refer to
2-1-7 CX-Process Monitor Plus Conversion Specifications for details on conversion specifications when converting to CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Section 2-1
Installation
Install the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Copy the converted data.
Note
Reset the Graphic Screen
data (if Graphic Screens
are being used).
1,2,3...
When the CX-Process Monitor Plus database is converted, the utility creates
a folder named ConvertedData in the folder where the CX-Process Monitor
Plus database was moved earlier in this procedure. Copy all of the files in this
folder, including the GRF folder and all files in the GRF folder, and paste them
in the newly installed CX-Process Monitor Plus database folder, overwriting
any files already there. (See note.)
This is the folder set for the database path in the File System Setup.
Monitor Plus version 2.1 default setting:
Windows 2000 or XP: C:\Program Files\Omron\CX-Process Monitor Plus\DB
Windows Vista: C:\Omron\CX-Process Monitor Plus\DB
If Graphic Screens are being used, the Graphic Screen data must be reset in
the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
1. Start the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
2. Start the Graphic Builder and select the command from the File Menu to
change the file information.
3. A list of registration information for previous graphic screens will be displayed. Specify each graphic file for each screen in the GRF folder in the
Monitor Plus' DB folder.
2-1-6
Converting Data from CX-Process Monitor
The following procedure can be used to convert data from the CX-Process
Monitor for use with the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Check the Version of the
CX-Process Monitor.
Check the version of the CX-Process Monitor currently installed on the computer.
Reset CX-Process Monitor
Tags Set with CX-Process
Tool as Tags for Monitor
Plus.
Monitor tags used on the CX-Process Monitor cannot be used on the CX-Process Monitor Plus. The following procedure must thus be used to reset all of
the CX-Process Monitor tags set with CX-Process Tool as tags for Monitor
Plus. If the same tag names as used for the CX-Process Monitor tags are
used for the CX-Process Monitor Plus, the work required in the last step of
this data conversion procedure can be minimized.
39
Section 2-1
Installation
1,2,3...
1. Display a monitor tag list on the CX-Process Tool (Execute – Output Tag
File – Monitor Tags) and confirm the monitor tags that are being used.
2. Register the function blocks for data exchange with the CX-Process Monitor Plus that correspond to the function blocks for data exchange with the
CX-Process Monitor.
3. For all of the tags set in the function blocks for data exchange with the CXProcess Monitor, set corresponding tags in the function blocks for data exchange with the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
4. Output the tag file for Monitor Plus (Execute – Output Tag File – Monitor
Plus Tag).
Move the CX-Process
Monitor Database
Move the CX-Process Monitor Database from the folder (see note) where CXProcess Monitor data is saved to another folder on the computer.
Note
Convert the CX-Process
Monitor Database
1,2,3...
This folder is set in the DB Path setting in the File System Setup. The default
setting is C:\Program Files\Omron\CX-Process Monitor\DB
Use the Trend DB Conversion Utility to convert the trend group definitions file
for use with the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
1. Start the Trend DB Conversion Utility. The Trend DB Conversion Utility is
stored at the following location:
CD-ROM drive: \MonitorPlusUpDate\UpDatePlusV2.exe
The following window will be displayed.
2. Click the Browse Button and specify the folder where the CX-Process
Monitor database was moved earlier in this procedure.
3. Click the conversion button corresponding to the CX-Process Monitor version confirmed earlier in this procedure.
• Monitor Version 1.2:
Ver 1.2 format (V1.2) → Plus Ver 2.1
• Monitor Version 1.5:
Ver 1.5 format (V1.5) → Plus Ver 2.1
• Monitor Version 2.0 or 2.5:
Vers 2.0 format (V2.0/V2.5) → Plus Ver 2.1
• Monitor Version 2.6:
Ver 2.6 format (V2.6) → Plus Ver 2.1
Note
40
Some data cannot be converted by the Trend DB Conversion Utility. Refer to
2-1-7 CX-Process Monitor Plus Conversion Specifications for details on conversion specifications when converting to CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Section 2-1
Installation
Uninstall the CX-Process Monitor.
Install the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Copy the Converted Data.
Note
Redo the Graphic Screen
Data Settings.
1,2,3...
When the CX-Process Monitor database was converted, a folder called ConvertedData will have been created in the folder where the CX-Process Monitor
database was moved earlier in this procedure. Copy all of the files in this
folder, including the GRF folder and all files in the GRF folder, and paste them
in the newly installed CX-Process Monitor Plus database folder, overwriting
any files already there. (See note.)
This is the folder set for the database path in the File System Setup.
Monitor Plus version 2.1 default setting:
Windows 2000 or XP: C:\Program Files\Omron\CX-Process Monitor Plus\DB
Windows Vista: C:\Omron\CX-Process Monitor Plus\DB
If Graphic Screens are being used, the Graphic Screen data must be reset in
the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
1. Start the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
2. Start the Graphic Builder and update the file information using the command on the File Menu.
3. A list of registration information for previous graphic screens will be displayed. Specify each graphic file for each screen in the GRF folder in the
Monitor Plus' DB folder.
Re-allocate the Tags for Monitor Plus That Have Been Reset on the Control Screens and Graphic
Screens
1,2,3...
1. If different tag names were used when the tags were reset for the CX-Process Monitor Plus, use the CRT Builder to set the tag names in Control
Screens and Trend Screens to the new tag names.
2. Reset all of the tag names allocated to objects (e.g., meters and tanks) on
Graphic Screens to the ones used when the tags were reset for the CXProcess Monitor Plus.
41
Section 2-1
Installation
2-1-7
CX-Process Monitor Plus Conversion Specifications
The following table shows the conversion specifications when using the Trend
DB Conversion Utility to convert CX-Process data to the latest CX-Process
Monitor Plus data format. When necessary, set the converted data into the latest version of CX-Process Monitor Plus again.
Setting or screen
Tag information
Data convertible?
CX-Process
CX-Process
Monitor Plus
Monitor data
Version 1 data
Yes
No
System Information setting
Yes
Yes
System Monitor Log Screen
Overview Screen
Control Screen
Tuning Screen
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Trend
Screen
Tag settings
Historical trend data
Real time trend data
Graphic screen data
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Graphic objects
Yes
Yes
Annunciator Screen
Operation Guide Screen
Yes
Partially
convertible
Yes
Partially
convertible
Alarm Log Screen
Partially
convertible
Partially
convertible
Operation Log Screen
System Monitor Log Screen
No
No
No
No
Graphic
Screen
42
Remarks
When CX-Process Monitor data is converted, the tags for CX-Process Monitor
Plus must be created again.
Settings added during version upgrades will
be set to their default values.
----------Past log data is discarded.
Past log data is discarded.
The path to the graphic screen data must
be set again. For details, For details, refer
to the instructions on resetting graphic
screen data in 2-1-5 or 2-1-6.
The earlier version’s data is converted asis, but new functions added during version
upgrades cannot be used.
When you want to use new functions, the
data must be created again in the new version of Monitor Plus.
--• The Operation Guide Message settings
are converted.
• Past log data is discarded.
• The alarm messages and alarm tag settings are converted.
• Past log data is discarded.
Past log data is discarded.
Past log data is discarded.
Section 2-2
Connecting the PLC
2-2
Connecting the PLC
The following three methods can be used to connect to the PLC. Regardless
of the connection method, the FinsGateway communications driver (embedded version) is used.
Communications
network
Host Link Network
(See note.)
Controller Link Network
Ethernet Network
Note
2-2-1
FinsGateway
communications
driver
Serial Unit Driver
Contents
Connecting to the peripheral or RS232C port of the PLC over Host
Link.
CLK (PCI slot) Driver
Connecting through the Controller
(Not supported by Fin- Link Support Board to a PLC with a
sGateway Version 2)
Controller Link Unit mounted.
ETN_UNIT Driver
Connecting through the Ethernet
Board to a PLC with an Ethernet
Unit mounted.
Host Link communications use FINS commands wrapped in header and terminator data (i.e., SYSWAY-CV for FinsGateway). Host Link communications
(SYSMAC WAY) is set for the CPU Unit.
Connecting via Host Link
The personal computer uses the FinsGateway’s Serial Unit Driver to connect
to the peripheral or RS-232C port of the PLC via Host Link communications.
Connections to the Peripheral
Port of the CPU Unit
CX-Process
Monitor Plus
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
(9-pin male)
CS1W-CN226 or
CS1W-CN626
Connecting Cable
Note
Connections to the RS-232C port of the CPU
Unit or Serial Communications Board or Unit
CX-Process
Monitor Plus
Loop Control Unit
CS1 CPU Unit
Peripheral
port
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
(9-pin male)
Loop Control Unit
CS1 CPU Unit
RS-232C Port
XW2Z-200S-CV
Connecting Cable
1. The Serial Communications Mode must be set to Host Link.
Host Link communications use FINS commands wrapped in header and
terminator data (i.e., SYSWAY-CV for FinsGateway). The peripheral bus
cannot be used.
2. The FinsGateway Serial Unit Driver must be installed to enable connecting
the PLC via Host Link communications.
3. The following Connecting Cables are used to connect the CX-Process Tool
(personal computer) to the PLC (CPU Unit or Serial Communications
Board/Unit).
43
Section 2-2
Connecting the PLC
Connecting Cables
Unit
CPU Unit
Serial Communications
Board or Unit
Port on Unit
Computer Port on computer
Built-in
IBM PC/
Male 9-pin Dperipheral
AT or com- SUB
port
patible
Built-in RS232C port
Female 9-pin
D-SUB
RS-232C port
Female 9-pin
D-SUB
Note
Serial ComModel
munications
Mode
Host Link
CS1W-CN226
CS1W-CN626
Length
Remarks
2.0 m
6.0 m
---
XW2Z-200S-CV
XW2Z-500S-CV
2m
5m
Anti-static
connector
XW2Z-200S-CV
XW2Z-500S-CV
2m
5m
anti-static
connector
Touch a grounded metal to discharge all static electricity from your body
before connecting any of the above cable connectors to the RS-232C port of
the PLC.
The [email protected]@@S-CV Cable uses the anti-static XM2S-0911-E Connector
Hood. For safety sake, however, discharge all static electricity from your body
before touching the connector.
The following components are used to connect RS-232C cable to the peripheral port.
Unit
CPU Unit
Port on Unit
Built-in
peripheral
port
Computer
Port on computer
IBM PC/
AT or
compatible
Male 9-pin DSUB
Serial ComModel
munications
Mode
CS1W-CN118 +
SYSMAC
XW2Z-200S-CV/
WAY (Host
500S-CV
Link)
CS1W-CN118 +
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V
Length
Remarks
0.1 m +
The XW(2 or 5 m) [email protected]@@S-CV
is an antistatic connector.
---
The following components are available for connecting the CQM1-CIF01 or
CQM1-CIF02 Cable to the peripheral port.
Unit
CPU Unit
Port on Unit
Built-in
peripheral
port
Computer
Port on computer
IBM PC/
AT or
compatible
Male 9-pin DSUB
Serial ComModel
munications
Mode
CS1W-CN114 +
SYSMAC
CQM1-CIF02
WAY (Host
Link)
Length
0.05 m +
3.3 m
Remarks
---
The following components are available for connecting the IBM PC/AT or compatible over RS-232C
Unit
Port on Unit
Computer
Port on computer
CPU Unit
Built-in RS232C port
Female 9-pin
D-SUB
RS-232C Port
Female 9-pin
D-SUB
IBM PC/
AT or
compatible
Male 9-pin DSUB
Serial Communications
Board or Unit
44
Serial ComModel
munications
Mode
XW2Z-200S-V
SYSMAC
WAY (Host
XW2Z-500S-V
Link)
XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V
Length
2m
5m
2m
5m
Remarks
---
Section 2-2
Connecting the PLC
2-2-2
Connecting through a Controller Link Support Board
The personal computer uses the FinsGateway Controller Link Driver to connect to the PLC over a Controller Link Network.
CX-Process
Monitor Plus
(IBM PC/AT or
compatible)
Loop Control Unit
Controller
Link Unit
Loop Control Unit
Controller
Link Unit
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Support Board
Note
Controller Link Unit
Models
Controller Link Unit
PLC
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CS1
CS1W-CLK12-V1
CS1W-CLK52-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
CJ
Controller Link Support
Boards
2-2-3
The FinsGateway CLK (PCI) Driver or Controller Link Driver with FinsGateway
version 2 or higher must be installed to enable connecting the PLC via a Controller Link Network.
Unit
Type
CPU Bus Unit Wired
Optical Ring
Optical
CPU Bus Unit Wired
Controller Link
Support Board
3G8F7-CLK12-V1
3G8F7-CLK52-V1
3G8F7-CLK21-V1
Transmission
medium
Optical fiber cable
(ring configuration)
Wire
3G8F5-CLK11-V1
3G8F5-CLK21-V1
Optical fiber cable
Wire
Transmission path
Twisted-pair cable
Optical fiber cable
GI Optical fiber cable
Twisted-pair cable
Computer
FinsGateway
Driver
IBM PC/AT or com- CLK (PCI slot)
patible (PCI slot)
Driver
(FinsGateway Version 2 cannot be
used.)
IBM PC/AT or com- Controller Link
patible
Driver
Connections via Ethernet
The personal computer uses the FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Driver to connects
to the PLC via Ethernet.
CX-Process
Monitor Plus
Loop Control
IBM PC/AT or
compatible Ethernet Unit
Unit
Loop Control Unit
Ethernet Unit
Ethernet
Ethernet Board
Note
The FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Driver must be installed to enable connecting
the PLC via Ethernet.
45
Section 2-2
Connecting the PLC
Ethernet Unit Model
Model
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN11
CJ1W-ETN21
46
PLC
CS Series
Unit
CPU Bus Unit
CJ
CPU Bus Unit
Transmission path
Ethernet 10Base-5
Ethernet 10Base-T
Ethernet 10Base-T
Ethernet 10Base-T
Ethernet 10Base-T
SECTION 3
Exchanging Data with Monitor Plus
This section explains how to exchange analog and digital (contact) data between Monitor Plus and the function blocks in
Loop Control Units and Boards.
3-1
Data Exchange Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
3-1-1
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
3-1-2
Exchanging Data with Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
3-1-3
Exchanging Analog Signal Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
3-1-4
Exchanging Contact Signal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
3-1-5
Exchanging Data with the User Link Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
3-2
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
3-3
Loop Control Unit Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
3-3-1
System Information Area Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
3-3-2
Applicable Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
47
Section 3-1
Data Exchange Method
3-1
3-1-1
Data Exchange Method
Overview
The function blocks listed in the following table must be registered/connected
in the Loop Control Unit/Board in order for the Monitor Plus Software to
access data in the Loop Control Unit/Board. Data is exchanged using the
function blocks and the tags set in those function block.
There are 4 possible cases, as shown in the following table.
Case
1
2
3
4
Note
3-1-2
Data
exchanged
Function block
(See note.)
Loop Control Unit
Loop Control Board
1. Set the HMI function set1. Register Send All Blocks
tings in the System Com(Block Model 462) and Remon Block (Block Model
ceive All Blocks (Block
000).
Model 461).
2. Set CSV tags in the func- 2. Set CSV tags in the function block.
tion blocks.
Analog signals When monitoring analog signals:
1. Register the Input Selector (Block Model 162).
2. Set the tags for Monitor Plus in the Input Selector (Block
Model 162).
3. Connect the function block’s analog signals in the Input Selector (Block Model 162).
When setting analog signals:
1. Register the Constant Generator (Block Model 166).
2. Set the tags for Monitor Plus in the Constant Generator
(Block Model 166).
3. Connect the function block’s analog signals in the Constant
Generator (Block Model 166).
Contact signals 1. Register the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) and Internal Switch (Block Model 209).
2. Set the target and source designations in the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201).
3. Set the tags for Monitor Plus.
When setting contact signals:
Specify the Internal Switch’s (Block Model 209) ITEM tags
as settings
When monitoring contact signals:
Specify the Internal Switch’s (Block Model 209) ITEM tags
as displays.
User link table None
Set the user link table.
Each function block’s ITEM list indicates which ITEMs will be read or written.
(An ITEM will not be read or written if “–––” is indicated for the R/W Mode in
the According to HMI or According to Monitor Plus columns.)
Exchanging Data with Function Blocks
This section explains how to use Monitor Plus to read and write data in function blocks within the Loop Control Unit or Board.
Loop Control Unit
Monitor Plus can be used to set function block data with Receive All Blocks
(Block Model 461) and monitor function block data with Send All Blocks (Block
Model 462).
Setting Function Block Data from Monitor Plus
Monitor Plus writes data directly to the specified function block’s tag. The
Receive All Blocks (Block Model 461) function block must be registered in
advance.
48
Section 3-1
Data Exchange Method
Setting Example:
Monitor Plus
Loop Control Unit
ITEMs accessed by
Receive/Send All Blocks
Basic
PID
Block
Basic
PID
Block
Receive
All Blocks
Specify tags for
Monitor Plus and
write directly.
High/Low
Limit
Timer
Monitoring Function Block Data from Monitor Plus
Monitor Plus monitors the Loop Control Unit’s function block data through the
Send All Blocks (Block Model 462) function block.
Monitoring Example:
Monitor Plus
Loop Control Unit
Send
Basic PID
Block
ITEMs
accessed by
Receive/Send
All Blocks
Basic PID
Block
High/Low
Limit
Timer
CPU Unit
Data area
Allocation
Specify tags
for Monitor
Plus and read.
Control Block
Send All
Blocks
Operation
Block
External
Controller
Block
Monitor Plus actually monitors data as shown in the following diagram.
Loop Control Unit
Function Blocks
CPU Unit
Send All Blocks
Send Stop Switch
Control blocks
(Block Models
001 to 034)
Operation blocks
(Block Models
111 to 224)
Number of control blocks
Sends corresponding ITEMS for
the specified number of blocks
starting with block address 001.
Number of operation blocks
Sends corresponding ITEMS for
the specified number of blocks
starting with block address 100.
Any I/O memory words (CIO,
WR, HR, DM, or EM bank 0)
Block address 001
ITEMS (20 words)
Block address n
ITEMS (20 words)
Block address 100
ITEMS (20 words)
Specify tags for
Monitor Plus
and read.
Monitor Plus
Block address m
ITEMS (20 words)
49
Section 3-1
Data Exchange Method
Loop Control Board
Monitor Plus uses the HMI function to set and monitor function block data.
Loop Control Unit
Monitor Plus
CPU Unit
I/O memory
System
Common
Block's
allocated
ITEMS
Control Block's
allocated
ITEMS
HMI
function
Each
operation
cycle
(See note.)
Specify CSV
tags and read.
EM area
(EM bank allocated
to the HMI function)
Operation Block's
allocated ITEMS
Specify CSV
tags and write.
HMI Function
The HMI function constantly exchanges ITEM data (20 words/block) of Control Blocks, Operation Blocks, External Controller Blocks, and the System
Common Block with the specified words in an EM bank in the CPU Unit in the
order of function block addresses.
Loop Control Unit
CPU Unit
Data area for HMI function
EM area
Example: EM bank 0 specified
Function block
System
Block address
Common
block (Block
Model 000) Block address
Control/
Operation
blocks
(Block
Models 001
to 500)
Block address 000
ITEMS (20 words)
Block address 001
ITEMS (20 words)
Send
Read
Block address 500
ITEMS (20 words)
Block address
External
Controller
blocks
(Block
Models 601
to 632)
System
Block address
Common
block (Block
Model 000) Block address
Control/
Operation
blocks
(Block
Models 001
to 500)
Send
Block address 632
ITEMS (20 words)
Receive
Block address 000
ITEMS (20 words)
Block address 001
ITEMS (20 words)
Receive
Write
Block address 500
ITEMS (20 words)
External
Controller
blocks
(Block
Models 601
to 632)
50
Monitor Plus
Block address 601
ITEMS (20 words)
Block address
Block address 601
ITEMS (20 words)
Receive
Block address 632
ITEMS (20 words)
Section 3-1
Data Exchange Method
3-1-3
Exchanging Analog Signal Data
The Loop Control Unit or Board’s analog signal data can be read and written
as follows:
• Setting (Writing) Analog Signal Data
The Constant Generator (Block Model 166) must be registered and data
must be written to each function block’s analog item. Set the tags for Monitor Plus in the Constant Generator (Block Model 166) function block’s
analog ITEMs.
• Monitoring (Reading) Analog Signal Data
The Input Selector (Block Model 162) must be registered and data must
be read from each function block’s analog item. Set the tags for Monitor
Plus in the Input Selector (Block Model 162) function block’s analog
ITEMs.
Setting Analog Signals
from Monitor Plus
Write data through the tags for Monitor Plus set in the Constant Generator
block (Block Model 166) from Monitor Plus. By writing to the Constant Generator block from Monitor Plus, it is possible to set analog values in the function
blocks.
Monitor Plus
Set tags for Monitor
Plus in each analog
output.
Loop Control
Unit or Board
Function
block
Analog
Constant Generator
(Block Model 166)
Specify the tags
for Monitor Plus
and write data.
Analog
Function
block
Analog
Analog
1,2,3...
1. Output (connect) the Constant Generator (Block Model 166) to the contact
input ITEMs in which you want to set analog values.
51
Data Exchange Method
Section 3-1
2. Set the tags for Monitor Plus in the Constant Generator (Block Model 166).
Set a tag name for each ITEM (Y1 to Y8).
3. Use Monitor Plus to specify the Constant Generator’s tags for Monitor Plus
and write the data to each ITEM (Y1 to Y8).
4. Use the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) to write each internal
switch’s bit data to the specified function block’s bits.
5. In the end, the analog values are set in the function block’s contact input
ITEM.
Monitoring Analog
Signals from Monitor Plus
52
Write data through the tags for Monitor Plus set in the Input Selector block
(Block Model 162) from Monitor Plus. By reading the analog values that are
input to the Input Selector, it is possible to monitor the analog values in the
function blocks.
Section 3-1
Data Exchange Method
Monitor Plus
Set tags for Monitor
Plus in each analog
input.
Loop Control
Unit or Board
Function
block
Analog
Input Selector
(Block Model 162)
Specify the tags
for Monitor Plus
and read.
Analog
Function
block
Analog
Analog
1,2,3...
1. Input (connect) the analog inputs to the Input Selector (Block Model 162)
from the function block’s contact input ITEMs containing analog values that
you want to monitor.
2. Set the tags for Monitor Plus in the Input Selector (Block Model 162). Set
a tag name for each ITEM (X1 to X8).
3. Use Monitor Plus to specify the Input Selector’s tags for Monitor Plus and
read the data from each ITEM (X1 to X8).
4. Use the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) to write each internal
switch’s bit data to the specified function block’s bits.
5. In the end, the analog values are monitored.
53
Section 3-1
Data Exchange Method
3-1-4
Exchanging Contact Signal Data
In order to read/write the Loop Control Unit or Board’s contact signal data, the
Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) and Internal Switch (Block Model 209)
blocks must be registered as a set and the Contact Distributor (Block Model
201) must be connected to each function block’s contact ITEMs. Set the tags
for Monitor Plus in the Internal Switch (Block Model 209) block’s bits.
Setting Bits from Monitor
Plus
Monitor Plus
Set tags for Monitor Plus.
(Select Set"to write data.)
CPU Unit
Loop Control Unit or Board
I/O memory
Function
block
Contact
Contact
Distributor
Contact (Block
Model 201)
Internal
Switch
(Block
Model 209)
Specify the tags
for Monitor Plus
and write data.
Write
Contact
Function
block
Contact
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) as the destination for
the function block’s contact input ITEM that you want to set. At the same
time, input (connect) the Internal Switch (Block Model 209) from the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201).
2. Set the tags for Monitor Plus in the Internal Switch (Block Model 209). Set
a tag name for each ITEM (S1 to S8).
Select Setting.
54
Section 3-1
Data Exchange Method
When setting data, select the Set Option.
3. Use Monitor Plus to specify the Internal Switch’s tags for Monitor Plus and
write the data to the Internal Switch’s bits through the CPU Unit’s data area.
4. Use the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) to write each internal
switch’s bit data to the specified function block’s bits.
5. In the end, the bits will be set to the function block’s contact input ITEMs.
Monitoring Bits from
Monitor Plus
Monitor Plus
Set tags for Monitor Plus.
(Select Display to read data.)
CPU Unit
Loop Control Unit or Board
I/O memory
Function
block
Contact
Distributor
(Block
Model 201)
Specify the tags
for Monitor Plus
and write data.
Internal
Switch
(Block
Model 209)
Function
block
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) as the source for the
function block’s contact input ITEM that you want to monitor. At the same
time, output (connect) from the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) to
the Internal Switch (Block Model 209).
2. Set the tags for Monitor Plus in the Internal Switch (Block Model 209). Set
a tag name for each ITEM (S1 to S8).
55
Section 3-1
Data Exchange Method
Select Display.
When monitoring data, select the Display option.
3. Use the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) to read data to each internal
switch’s bit.
4. Use Monitor Plus to specify the Internal Switch’s tags for Monitor Plus and
read Internal Switch’s bit data through the CPU Unit’s data area.
5. The bit data will monitored.
3-1-5
Exchanging Data with the User Link Table
The user link table can be used to read/write data in the CPU Unit’s memory.
The CPU Unit’s memory data areas can be read/written from Monitor Plus by
setting tags in this user link table.
Monitor Plus
Loop Control Board
Function block data
Virtual link
table block
Tag A
Tag C
56
CPU Unit
User link table
Tag A
Tag B
Tag C
Write
Wr (LCB→)
I/O memory
Tag A
Write
Wr (LCB→)
Tag B
Read
Rd (→LCB)
Tag C
Specify the tags
and read/write.
Section 3-1
Data Exchange Method
Setting/Monitoring Digital
Data through the User
Link Table
Specify the CPU
Unit's data area.
Select Contact or
Analog.
When monitoring,
select Wr (LCB").
When setting,
select Rd ("LCB).
Always select this
option.
Select this option
when specifying
an alarm tag.
Always select this
option.
Setting/Monitoring Analog
Data through the User
Link Table
Specify the CPU
Unit's data area.
Select Contact or
Analog.
When monitoring,
select Wr (LCB").
When setting,
select Rd ("LCB).
Always select this
option.
Always select this
option.
Note
Set the range for analog data.
Always make these settings.
1. The link memory values can be read directly in Monitor Plus when the
R/W setting is set to Wr (LCB→) and reading from the ITEM is disabled.
When reading the link memory values directly this way, set the Link Mode
to an external sync and set the external sync contact to the System Common Block’s 020: U0 (always output 0) ITEM.
57
Section 3-2
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
2. If the above tag values are changed using CX-Process Monitor Plus when
the R/W setting is set to "Rd (→LCB)" and writing to the ITEM is enabled,
the link memory values in the user link table will be changed and as a result
the function block ITEM will be changed.
When making the setting, make sure that ladder program and function
block operations will not be adversely affected.
3-2
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
This section shows example function blocks that exchange data with Monitor
Plus. To explain the operation of the function blocks, the examples show how
to monitor the following kind of program from Monitor Plus.
Set Basic PID block's SP
value from Monitor Plus.
(See example 2-1.)
Use Constant Generator
(Block Model 166).
Set Basic PID block's Remote/Local
switch from Monitor Plus.
(See example 3-1.)
Use Internal Switch (Block Model 209) and
Contact Distributor (Block Model 201).
Basic PID
PV
(Feedback from
the whole system)
First-order
lag
Monitor the Basic PID block's High MV
limit output (MHA) from Monitor Plus.
(See example 3-2.)
Monitor the First-order Lag block's
Y1 output from Monitor Plus.
(See example 2-2.)
Use Internal Switch (Block Model 209)
Use Input Selector (Block Model 162).
and Contact Distributor (Block Model 201).
A “main function block” and “monitor function block” are required to create a
block diagram for this example.
The following project provides the operations required in this example.
58
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
Section 3-2
Step 1: Creating the Main Function Block
First create the main function block, which is the heart of the control system.
This example requires a Basic PID block (Block Model 011) and a First-order
Lag block (Block Model 141).
The following diagram shows the main function block.
PV
(Feedback from
the whole system)
Output to
Monitor Plus
Input from
Monitor Plus
Note
Set ITEM 024 (Set point setting mode) of the Basic PID block to 1 (Remote/
Local). The Remote/Local setting mode must be enabled in order for the
Remote/Local setting to be made with a contact input.
59
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
Section 3-2
Step 2: Registering Function Blocks for Data Exchange
1. Exchanging Function
Block Data
Make the following settings to monitor the MV_C output from the Basic PID
block, which is the heart of the control system. Send All Blocks (Block Model
461) and Receive All Blocks (Block Model 462) must be registered in order to
monitor the MV_C output from the Basic PID block.
1-1 Registering “Send All Blocks” and “Receive All Blocks”
Register Send All Blocks (Block Model 461) and Receive All Blocks (Block
Model 462) in the project, as shown in the following diagram.
1-2 Settings for Send All Blocks and Receive All Blocks
The following ITEMs must be set in the Send All Blocks (Block Model 461)
and Receive All Blocks (Block Model 462) function blocks. These settings
specify the CPU Unit’s allocated data area as well as the number of function
blocks that will be sent and received.
• CPU Unit data area
• Leading address of the specified data area
• Number of Control blocks
• Number of Operation blocks
• Number of External Controller blocks
60
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
Section 3-2
The following settings are made in this example.
ITEM
Send All Blocks
Receive All Blocks
(Block Model 462)
(Block Model 461)
Data area
3:D (DM area)
Leading address
00000
10000
Number of Control blocks
32 (default setting)
Number of Operation blocks
5 (Five are used in this example.)
Number of External Controller 0
blocks
2. Exchanging Analog Signal Data
2-1 Setting Analog Data from Monitor Plus
Example: Setting the Basic PID block’s RSP value from Monitor Plus
This step registers a function block that inputs an analog signal from Monitor
Plus to the Basic PID block. In this case, an analog input is being sent from
Monitor Plus, so the Constant Generator (Block Model 166) is registered and
connected.
This function block is registered and connected
to input an analog signal from Monitor Plus.
PV
(Feedback from
the whole system)
Setting the Tag for Monitor Plus
This step sets the tags for Monitor Plus needed to set an analog signal in the
Constant Generator (Block Model 166) from Monitor Plus. This tag is specified
from Monitor Plus to set the analog value.
61
Section 3-2
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
Tag name “AnalogIn1” is set for ITEM Y1.
2-2 Creating a Function Block to Monitor Data from Monitor Plus
Monitoring the Filtered PID Output from Monitor Plus
This step registers a function block that monitors the analog output from the
First-order Lag block (the filtered PID Block output). In this case, an analog
input is being monitored from Monitor Plus, so the Input Selector (Block Model
162) is registered and connected.
This function block is registered and connected
to monitor the analog output.
PV
(Feedback from
the whole system)
Setting the Tags for Monitor Plus
This step sets the tag for Monitor Plus needed to monitor the analog signal in
the Input Selector (Block Model 162). This tag is specified from Monitor Plus
to monitor the analog value.
62
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
Section 3-2
In this case, the tag name “AnalogOut1” is set for ITEM X1.
Creating Function Blocks
to Set/Monitor Bit Data
This step registers and connects a function block that sets or monitors
another function block’s bit data from Monitor Plus. The Contact Distributor
(Block Model 201) and Internal Switch (Block Model 209) blocks must be used
because bit data is being set or monitored.
Bit data is set or monitored through the CPU Unit’s I/O memory and the Loop
Control Unit or Board’s internal memory. The direction of connections must be
correct to transfer the data properly.
Note
It is not necessary to go through the Contact Distributor when using bits in a
sequence table or step ladder.
63
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
Section 3-2
PV
(Feedback from
the whole system)
These function blocks set or monitor
bit data from Monitor Plus.
3-1 Setting a Bit (Contact)
Example: Setting the Basic PID block’s R/L Switch from Monitor Plus
The following steps are required to set a bit’s status.
1,2,3...
1. Write the data to the CPU Unit’s data area from Monitor Plus, read this data
with the Internal Switch (Block Model 209), and write it to the Loop Control
Unit or Board’s internal memory.
2. Use the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) to input the data (written to
internal memory in step 1) to the function block’s bit. In this case, the bit
data is input to the Basic PID block’s Remote/Local Switch ITEM.
3. Set the tag for Monitor Plus (used to set the bit from Monitor Plus) in the
Internal Switch’s bit. In this case, S1’s tag name is set to RLSW.
64
Section 3-2
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
Monitor Plus
Set tags for Monitor Plus.
(Select Setting to write data.)
Loop Control Unit or Board
CPU Unit
I/O memory
Contact Contact
Distributor
Function
Contact (Block
block
Model 201)
Write
Specify the tags
for Monitor Plus
and write data.
Internal
Switch
(Block
Model 209)
Contact
Function
block
Contact
Actual Setting Procedure
The following settings are used to set a bit’s status from Monitor Plus.
1,2,3...
1. Set the tag for Monitor Plus in the Internal Switch (Block Model 209) block’s
S1 ITEM. Set the tag type to Set.
Select Setting.
2. Set the Contact Distributor block’s S1_AD ITEM (S1 source designation)
to the Internal Switch block’s S1 ITEM. In this case, S1_AD is set to
103011.
3. Set the Contact Distributor block’s E1_AD ITEM (E1 destination) to the Basic PID block’s R/L_SW ITEM (Remote/Local switch). In this case, E1_AD
is set to 001026.
65
Section 3-2
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
3-2 Monitoring a Contact (Bit)
Example: Monitoring the Basic PID block’s High MV Limit Output (MHA) from
Monitor Plus
The following steps are required to monitor a bit’s status.
1,2,3...
1. Use the Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) to temporarily store the
function block’s bit status in the Loop Control Unit or Board’s memory.
2. Use the Internal Switch (Block Model 209) to read the temporarily stored
data from memory and write it to the CPU Unit’s data area.
3. Set the tag for Monitor Plus (used to monitor the bit from Monitor Plus) in
the Internal Switch’s bit. In this case, S2’s tag name is set to MHA.
Monitor Plus
Set tags for Monitor Plus.
(Select Display to read data.)
Loop Control Unit or Board
CPU Unit
I/O memory
Function
block
Contact
Distributor
(Block
Model 201)
Specify the tags
for Monitor Plus
and write data.
Internal
Switch
(Block
Model
209)
Function
block
Actual Setting Procedure
The following settings are used to monitor a bit’s status from Monitor Plus.
66
Section 3-2
Example Function Blocks for Data Exchange
1,2,3...
1. Set the tag for Monitor Plus in the Internal Switch (Block Model 209) block’s
S2 ITEM. Set the tag type to Display. Set the tag name to MHA.
Select Display.
2. Set the Contact Distributor block’s S2_AD ITEM (S2 source designation)
to the Basic PID block’s MHA ITEM (High MV Limit Output). In this case,
S2_AD is set to 001078.
3. Set the Contact Distributor block’s E2_AD ITEM (E2 destination) to the Internal Switch (Block Model 209) block’s S2 ITEM. In this case, E2_AD is
set to 103012.
67
Section 3-3
Loop Control Unit Precautions
3-3
3-3-1
Loop Control Unit Precautions
System Information Area Settings
When monitoring a Loop Control Unit with Monitor Plus, the “system information area” is used to display and set the system information. To use the system information area, the following data must be set in the System Common
block (Block Model 000) in the Loop Control Unit.
Default Settings to the System Common block (Block Model 000)
ITEM
Function
Setting range
Default
043 Leading address (S) of the data memory
0 to 32767
16020
for node Terminals
0 to 2
0
042 LCU number
A unique LCU number identifies each Loop
Control Unit when there are multiple Loop
Control Units (3 Units max.) mounted in the
CPU Rack.
System Information
System information is information such as the Loop Control Unit’s unit
address and operating information. When the Loop Control Unit starts, this
information is written to the 24 words (8 words per Loop Control Unit) starting
with the leading address the data memory for node Terminals.
Loop Control Unit Loop Control Unit Loop Control Unit
LCU number 1
LCU number 0
LCU number 2
System
Information
(8 words)
System
Information
(8 words)
System
Information
(8 words)
CPU Unit
DM Area
Leading address
of data memory
for node Terminals
8 words
8 words
8 words
Note
1. The default leading address of the data memory for node Terminals is
D16020 and the default LCU number is 0. Accordingly, the default location
for the system information is the eight words from D16020 to D16027 when
the Loop Control Unit is started. If the Loop Control Unit is being used with
its default settings, do not use words D16020 to D16027 for any other applications.
2. When two or three Loop Control Units are mounted in the same CPU Rack,
set a unique LCU number (ITEM042) in each Loop Control Unit to distinguish the Units. In addition, set the same leading address of the data memory for node Terminals (ITEM043) in each Loop Control Units.
3-3-2
Applicable Versions
The Send All Blocks (Block Model 461) and Receive All Blocks (Block Model
462) are not supported by Loop Control Units prior to version 2.0. CX-Process
Monitor Plus thus cannot be used with Loop Control Units prior to version 2.0.
68
SECTION 4
Monitor Screen Functions and Operations
This section describes the monitor screens used with the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
4-1
Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
4-2
Using the CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
4-3
CX-Process Tool Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
4-4
Starting and Stopping the CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
4-4-1
Starting the CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
4-4-2
Stopping the CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
4-5
Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
4-6
Screen Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
4-7
Control Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
4-7-1
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
4-7-2
Basic Displays and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
4-7-3
Display Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
Tuning Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
4-8
4-9
Trend Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
4-9-1
Real Time Trend Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
4-9-2
Historical Trend Screen Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
4-10 Batch Trend Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
4-10-1 Batch Trend Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
4-10-2 Collecting and Saving Trend Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
4-11 Segment Program 2 Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
4-11-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
4-11-2 Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen Examples and Operations . . .
108
4-11-3 Segment Program 2 Edit Screen Display Examples and Operations
117
4-12 Graphic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
4-13 Annunciator Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
4-14 Operation Guide Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
4-15 Alarm Log Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
4-16 Operation Log Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
4-17 System Monitor Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
4-17-1 System Monitor Screen Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
4-17-2 Loop Control Unit/Board Run/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
4-17-3 Backing Up Data during Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
4-17-4 Function Block Error Dialog Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
4-18 System Monitor Log Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
69
Section 4-1
Outline
4-1
Outline
This section explains the functions and operations for each screen primarily
for those people who will operate CX-Process Monitor Plus. The explanations
assume that CX-Process Tool settings and screen configuration for the CXProcess Monitor Plus have already been completed.
Refer to SECTION 5 Configuration Screens for how to configure CX-Process
Monitor Plus screens. Also, refer to the CX-Process Tool Operation Manual
(W372) for CX-Process Tool settings.
CX-Process Monitor Plus screen configuration is already completed, monitor
the Loop Control Unit/Board mainly by performing the following operations.
1,2,3...
1. Start CX-Process Monitor Plus (refer to 4-4 Starting and Stopping the CXProcess Monitor Plus).
2. In the CX-Process Monitor Plus Main Window, click the Run Button to display the Overview Screen (refer to 4-5 Overview Screen).
3. From the Overview Screen, move to each of the following screens.
• Control Screen (see 4-7 Control Screens)
• Tuning Screen (see 4-8 Tuning Screens)
• Trend Screen (see 4-9 Trend Screens)
• Batch Trend Screen (see 4-10 Batch Trend Screens)
• Segment Program 2 Screen (see 4-11 Segment Program 2 Screens)
• Graphic Screen (see 4-12 Graphic Screens)
• Annunciator Screen (see 4-13 Annunciator Screens)
• Operation Guide Screen (see 4-14 Operation Guide Screens)
• Alarm Log Screen (see 4-15 Alarm Log Screens)
• Operation Log Screen (see 4-16 Operation Log Screens)
• System Monitor Screen (see 4-17 System Monitor Screens)
• System Monitor Log Screen (see 4-18 System Monitor Log Screens)
4-2
Using the CX-Process Monitor Plus
Preparations on the CX-Process Tool
1,2,3...
1. Set the network address, node address, and unit address.
2. Register the function blocks for data exchange with the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
3. Set CSV tags and tags for the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
4. Generate the tag file for Monitor Plus.
5. Download the function block data to the Loop Control Unit/Board.
Operations on the CX-Process Monitor Plus
6. Start the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
7. In the Main Window, click the Run Button to compile the monitor tag file.
(See note.)
8. In the Overview Screen, select Control Screen, Trend Screen, etc. as required.
Note
70
Steps 7. will not be required and a specified screen will be displayed if autostarting is enabled. Autostarting can be enabled by clicking the System Info.
Button when configuring the screen and then setting the Auto-start–Auto-start
setting to Enable.
Section 4-3
CX-Process Tool Procedures
4-3
CX-Process Tool Procedures
The following six steps must be performed on the CX-Process Tool to pass
tag data to the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
1,2,3...
1. Set the network address, node address, and unit address.
2. Register and connect the function blocks that exchange data with the CXProcess Monitor Plus.
3. Set the CSV tags and the tags for Monitor Plus.
4. Generate the tag file for Monitor Plus.
5. Download the function block data to the Loop Control Unit/Board.
6. Compile the monitor tag files.
Set Network Address,
Node Address, and Unit
Address.
The CX-Process Monitor Plus uses the network address, node address, and
unit address set using the CX-Process Tool (Settings/Network Settings or
Settings/Change PLC) for communications with the PLC. The communications settings for the CX-Process Monitor Plus and thus made from the CXProcess Tool.
Note
The CX-Process Monitor and CX-Process Monitor Plus use FinsGateway as
the communications driver for connections with the PLC. When using the CXProcess Monitor or CX-Process Monitor Plus, always set FinsGateway as the
communications driver for the CX-Process Tool. If the CX-Server is set, the
CX-Process Monitor or CX-Process Monitor Plus will not be able to go online
with the PLC.
Register and Connect Function Blocks To Exchange Data with CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Item
Function block data to
exchange
Contact signals to exchange
Analog signals to exchange
Loop Control Unit
Loop Control Board
Send All Blocks block (Block Model 462) and HMI settings in the System Common
Receive All Blocks block (Block Model 461)
block (Block Mode 000)
Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) or Internal Switch (Block Model 209)
Input Selector block (Block Model 162) and Constant Generator block (Block Model 166)
Block to input analog signals from
the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Main function blocks
Block to output analog signals to
the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Blocks to monitor function
block ITEM tags from the
CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Blocks to manipulate or display contacts
from the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
71
Section 4-3
CX-Process Tool Procedures
Set CSV Tags and Tags for
Monitor Plus.
Always set the CSV tags and tags for the CX-Process Monitor Plus. The CXProcess Monitor Plus recognizes CSV tags and tags for the CX-Process Monitor Plus using tag names.
Example for Internal Switch Block (Block Model 209)
Item
Tag names
Tag comments
Note
1,2,3...
72
Prohibited characters
None
None
Set the range upper limit (RH) and range lower limit (RL) for scaling on the
CX-Process Monitor Plus to the range given in the following table.
Number of digits
Numeric range
Generate Tag File for
Monitor Plus.
No. of character
16 max.
16 max.
5 max. including sign and decimal point
–5000 to 99999
Example with one digit below the decimal point:
–550.0 to 9999.9
Generate the tag file for Monitor Plus using the following procedure.
1. Select Execute – Output Tag File – Monitor Plus Tag. The following window will be displayed. To execute an error check, select the option to perform an error check.
Section 4-3
CX-Process Tool Procedures
2. Click the OK Button. Compilation of CSV tags and tags for Monitor Plus will
begin. The following message will be displayed if compilation ends normally.
Note
If the tag file for Monitor Plus is output while the CX-Process Monitor Plus is
running, the following dialog box will be displayed.
Tag information will not be updated if a tag file for Monitor Plus is output during CX-Process Monitor Plus operation. To update the tag file, restart the CXProcess Monitor Plus.
Download Function Block
Data to Loop Control Unit/
Board.
Download the function blocks.
Compile Monitor Tag Files.
The monitor tag file is automatically generated when the CX-Process Monitor
Plus is started.
For details on starting the CX-Process Monitor Plus, refer to 5-2-1 Starting
and Stopping the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Monitor tag files that are generated will be created under the following directory and file name.
For details on setting database path, refer to 5-5-2 Overview of Screen Registration on page 176.
File names: mtagmst and mtagsubmst
!WARNING After changing the CX-Process Monitor Plus tag settings or network configuration, set the CX-Process Monitor Plus screen configuration correctly according to the new settings.
Incorrect settings may result in unexpected operation.
73
Starting and Stopping the CX-Process Monitor Plus
4-4
4-4-1
Section 4-4
Starting and Stopping the CX-Process Monitor Plus
Starting the CX-Process Monitor Plus
This section explains how to start and stop the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
1,2,3...
1. Select Start – Programs – Omron – CX-Process Monitor Plus – CXProcess Monitor Plus.
The CX-Process Monitor Plus’s Main Window will be displayed.
Note
When you have finished using CX-Process Monitor Plus, click the
Exit Button in the Main Window. The Main Window and CX-Process Monitor Plus will both close.
2. Click the Run Button.
The monitoring process will be started, and the Overview Screen will be
displayed. (Refer to 4-5 Overview Screen.)
When the configuration has been completed, monitoring can be started
from the Overview Screen. Refer to SECTION 5 Configuration Screens for
configuration.
Note
1. If auto-starting has been specified (i.e., if the Auto-start enable option is
selected in the Auto-start settings), the screen that has been set will be displayed directly. (Refer 5-7 Checking Configurations.)
2. When new tag or network information settings are made, the following dialog box will be displayed.
Import Tag Information to Go to Setup Button:
Regenerates the monitor tag file from the CX-Process Monitor Plus tag file.
When this button is clicked, a dialog box will be displayed to input the password. For details on passwords, refer to 5-2-2 Setting Passwords.
Run without Importing Tag Information Button:
Starts monitoring according to the tag information from the previous monitoring.
74
Starting and Stopping the CX-Process Monitor Plus
4-4-2
Section 4-4
Stopping the CX-Process Monitor Plus
To stop the CX-Process Monitor Plus, click the Close Button at the top right of
the Overview Screen. If a monitoring process, such as data or trend collection, is in progress, a dialog box will be displayed to confirm that the process is
to be stopped.
Select Yes to end the monitor process. Select No to continue running the
monitor process.
Note
Stopping a Monitoring Process That Was Continued:
Use the following procedure to stop a process that was continued by clicking
the No Button in the above dialog box.
1. Start the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
2. Click the Exit Button in the CX-Process Monitor Plus Main Window. The
dialog box will again be displayed to confirm that the process is to be
stopped. Click the Yes Button.
The CX-Process Monitor Plus will be closed and the monitoring process
will be stopped.
75
Section 4-5
Overview Screen
4-5
Overview Screen
The Overview Screen displays all the menu screens and displays alarms.
Click this button to move to
the Control Screen.
The status of data collection for a Batch Trend Screen
is displayed.
Batch Trend Data Logging (Background: Red): Collecting data.
Batch Completed (Background: Blue): Not collecting data.
Each button represents
one loop. Click the button
to display the Tuning
Screen for the loop.
If a user-set error
occurs, the button for
the Annunciator
Screen will flash.
The status of data collection for
Segment Program 2 Screen is displayed.
Segment Program Data Logging
(Background: Red): Collecting data.
Segment Program Completed
(Background: Blue): Not collecting data.
The button icons for the registered Control Screen, Trend Screen, Batch Trend
Screen, Graphic Screen, Segment Program 2 Screen, and Annunciator
Screen will be displayed.
Icon
Screen type
Control Screen
Icon
Screen type
Segment Program 2
Screen
Trend Screen
Graphic Screen
Batch Trend Screen
Annunciator Screen
Each screen displays eight rows and four columns to a maximum of 32
screens. The alarm status for each loop is shown on the Control Screen button.
Select the icon to move to the registered screen.
If a user-set alarm occurs, the icon for the Annunciator Screen flashes.
When returning to the Overview Screen from any screen, first select Overview from among the screen selection buttons, and then select the Overview
Screen name.
More than one Overview Screen can be displayed by clicking the System
Info. Button when configuring the screen and then setting the Multi-screen–
Multi-screen setting to Enable. Refer to 5-6 System Information Settings for
details.
Note
76
Auto-starting can be enabled or disabled by clicking the right mouse button at
the top of an Overview Screen. Click the Yes Button on the dialog box that
appears and then set Auto-start to as required.
Section 4-6
Screen Configurations
4-6
Screen Configurations
This section explains the configuration of the CX-Process Monitor Plus
Screen as a whole. The following example shows the Overview Screen.
Screen Selection Buttons: Right-click
here to confirm the CRT-ID, group
number, and position of the screen
specified for automatic startup.
Refer to the table below for each
button's function.
When a new message
appears in the
Operation Guide
Screen, a red mark is
displayed, and a
buzzer will sound at
the same time.
Click here and then set a tag
name to select any Tuning
Screen.
System Monitor Message Display Area:
Displays the most recent System Monitor
message, and a buzzer will sound at the same
time. The message is stored in the System
Monitor Log.
Click the
Button to delete the message.
The buzzer will also stop at the same time.
Use these buttons to
start any external
applications that have
been set.
Alarm Message
Display Area:
Displays the most
recent alarm
message, and a
buzzer will sound at
the same time. The
message is stored on
the Alarm Log screen.
Click the
Button
to delete the
message. The
buzzer will also stop
at the same time.
This area displays
all the Monitor
Screens. The
example shows the
Overview Screen.
Use the Screen
Selection Buttons to
change the display.
Prints a hardcopy of the screen.
Displays the date and time
Return to previous screen
Note
The bottom line will appear as follows for some screens.
Prints error log data on Operation Guide
Screen, Alarm Log Screens, Operation
Log Screens, and System Monitor Log
Screens.
77
Section 4-7
Control Screens
Screen Selection Buttons
Button name
Overview
Function
Displays the Overview Screen. If multiple Overview Screens
are registered, a pull-down menu will be displayed from which
you can select the Overview Screen you want.
Alarm
Displays the Alarm Log Screen.
Operation Log
Displays the Operation Log Screen.
Operation Guide
Displays the Operation Guide Screen.
System Monitor
Displays the System Monitor Screen to show system status.
System Monitor Log Displays the System Monitor Log Screen, which registers system messages.
About
Displays information on the CX-Process Monitor Plus version.
External applicaStart external applications set in the System Info.
tion start buttons
4-7
4-7-1
Control Screens
Outline
Use Control Screens to monitor and set the Control Block and part of the
Operation Block, to monitor analog signals, and to monitor and set contact
signals. For the Control Block in particular, use the Control screen to perform
such operations as monitoring Set Point (SP), Process Variable (PV), Manipulated Variable (MV) run status, and Set Point (SP) changes, etc.
Click the Control Screen Button in the Overview screen to display the following information on the Control Screen.
• You can display up to a maximum of eight loops per screen of PID, Indicators, and other Control Blocks as on-site Instrument images. The maximum is 400 screens x eight loops.
• You can perform SP changes, auto/manual switching, and manual operations, etc. (Items indicated by a Button can be changed. Items without a
Button are displayed only.)
• You can also move to the Tuning Screen.
Block name (mode)
Target function block
Display
Setting
78
Send source function block, or ITEM
Control Blocks: Basic PID (011), Advanced PID (012), Blended PID (Block Model 013), Batch
Flowrate Capture (Block Model 014), Indication and Setting (031), Indication and Operation
(032), Ratio Setting (033), Indicator (034), 2-position ON/OFF (001), 3-position ON/OFF (002)
Operation Blocks: High/Low Alarm (111), Segment Program 2 (157), ON/OFF Valve Manipulator (221), Motor Manipulator (222), Reversible Motor Manipulator (223), Motor Opening Manipulator (224), Timer (205), Counter (208)
The following for all function blocks:
Analog input signals (Input Selector (Block Model 162))
Analog output signals (Constant Generator (Block Model 166))
Contact input signals or contact output signals for all function blocks, or contact value parameters (Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) + Internal Switch (Block Model 209))
SP, PV, MV, A/M status, R/L status (See note 1), bar color change analog signal when an alarm
occurs, contact signal
SP, MV (only in manual mode), A/M switching (See note 3), R/L switching (See notes 1 and 2.)
Contact signal (See note 4.)
Section 4-7
Control Screens
Note
1. When the SP setting (local only, or remote/local both possible) for
ITEM024 for Basic PID, Advanced PID, Indication and Setting, Ratio Setting, 2-position ON/OFF, and 3-position ON/OFF is 1 (remote/local both
possible), CAS is displayed. If the setting is 0 (local only), nothing is displayed.
2. When the SP setting (local only, or remote/local both possible) for
ITEM024 for Basic PID, Advanced PID, Indication and Setting, Ratio Setting, 2-position ON/OFF, and 3-position ON/OFF is 1 (remote/local both
possible), CAS is displayed, and settings can be made.
3. When set to remote, only auto is possible; manual is disabled (this limit
only applies to CX-Process Monitor Plus).
4. Analog signals are not possible.
4-7-2
Basic Displays and Operations
Basic PID (011)
Click this button to move to the Tuning
screen. See 4-8 Tuning Screens for details.
Click this button to display the Set
Label Dialog Box.
Tag comment
PV numerical value display
SP Change Button
SP numerical value display
HH (High/High Alarm)
Remote/local switch
H (High Alarm)
Displays SP position
PV bar display
Up/Down Buttons to change SP
Switch to AUTO Button
L (Low Alarm)
Switch to MAN Button
LL (Low/Low Alarm)
Manual Pointer
Display MV position
MV Change Button
Display MV
numerical value
Up/Down Buttons to
change MV
PV Bar Display
Displays the PV range from upper to lower limit as a bar.
Green: Status normal
Red: PV Alarm (either HH, H, L, LL)
Yellow: Deviation Alarm
Blue: Alarm OFF
Light blue: Function block calculations stopped
79
Section 4-7
Control Screens
Changing SP
Change SP using the SP Change Up/Down Buttons.
First press the SP Button, select the value column, and then enter the change
using the ten-key dialog (using the mouse), or the keyboard. (The ten-key pad
is displayed when the input box is selected. To enable inputting from the tenkey, click the System Info. Button in the Setup Dialog Box, and then change
the setting to enable the ten-key.
Changing MV
Change the MP using the MP Change Up/Down Buttons.
First press the MP Button, and then enter the change using the ten-key dialog
box (using the mouse), or the keyboard.
Remote/Local (R/L)
Switching
When the SP setting (local only, or remote/local both possible) for ITEM024
for Basic PID, Advanced PID, Indication and Setting, Ratio Setting, 2-position
ON/OFF, and 3-position ON/OFF is 1 (remote/local both possible), CAS is displayed.
When the CAS Button is red, the setting is on remote SP. When the CAS Button is blue, the setting is on local SP. Click the CAS Button to switch the setting.
Note
A/M Switching
When the CX-Process Monitor Plus is set to Remote SP, A/M automatically
switches to AUTO. You cannot set Manual.
When AUTO is lit red, the setting is AUTO. You can change the SP value.
When MAN is lit blue, the setting is manual. You can change MV and SP values. Select AUTO or MAN to switch.
MV Adjustment Area Details:
Basic PID (011), Advanced PID (012), Batch Flowrate Capture (014), Indication and Operation (032),
Ratio Setting (033)
MV open direction
enabled (0%)
MV open direction
enabled (100%)
AUTO or
remote (CAS)
Manual
MV open direction
disabled
AUTO or
remote (CAS)
Manual
Manual
Pointer
No Manual Pointer
Output limit (ML)
Output limit (MH)
Make Manual Pointer and MV open direction settings when registering the
Control Screen. Refer to 5-5-2 Overview of Screen Registration for details.
Make output limit (ML, MH) settings using the Tuning screen. Refer to 4-8 Tuning Screens for details.
2-position ON/OFF (001)
AUTO or remote (CAS)
3-position ON/OFF (002)
Manual
Output operation switches
80
AUTO or remote (CAS)
Manual
Output operation switches
Section 4-7
Control Screens
Batch Flowrate Capture (014)
Blended PID (013)
Click this button to move
to the Tuning screen.
See 4-8 Tuning Screens
for details.
Click this button to move to the Tuning screen.
See 4-8 Tuning Screens for details.
Click this button to display
the Set Label Dialog Box.
Click this button to display
the Set Label Dialog Box.
PV numerical value display
Instantaneous value of
flowrate display
Batch accumulated
value display
Accumulation Counter
Reset Button (S3)
SP (1 Batch)
Change Button
SP numerical value display
Switch to
Remote Button
Preset value (BM) display
Batch accumulated value
(SM) display
SP numerical value display
SP position display
PV bar display
Batch Run
Button (S1 = ON)
Main batch display
Pre-batch display
Batch Stop
Button (S1 = OFF)
Control Restart Button
(S2 = OFF)
Control Interrupt Button
(S2 = ON)
Switch to AUTO Button
Switch to MAN Button
Switch to AUTO Button
Switch to MAN Button
PV Bar Display
Displays the PV range from upper to lower limit as a bar.
Green: Status normal
Red: Deviation Alarm (DHH, DH, DL, or DLL)
Yellow: MV Limit High/Low
Blue: Alarm OFF
Light blue: Function block calculations stopped
Indication and Setting (031)
Indication and Operation (032)
Click this button to move to the Tuning screen.
See 4-8 Tuning Screens for details.
Click this button to move to the Tuning screen.
See 4-8 Tuning Screens for details.
Click this button to
display the Set Label
Dialog Box.
Click this button to display
the Set Label Dialog Box.
SP Change Button
PV numerical
value display
PV numerical
value display
HH (High/High Alarm)
SP numerical
value display
AUTO input numerical
value display
H (High Alarm)
SP position
display
HH (High/High Alarm)
H (High Alarm)
Switch to Remote Button
Up/Down Buttons
to change SP
PV bar display
AUTO input
position display
PV bar display
L (Low Alarm)
L (Low Alarm)
Switch to Local Button
LL (Low/Low Alarm)
PV Bar Display
Displays the PV range from upper to lower limit as a bar.
Green: Status normal
Red: PV Alarm (either HH, H, L, LL)
Blue: Alarm OFF
Light blue: Function block calculations stopped
LL (Low/Low Alarm)
Switch to AUTO Button
Switch to MAN Button
PV Bar Display
Displays the PV range from upper to lower limit as a bar.
Green: Status normal
Red: PV Alarm (either HH, H, L, LL)
Blue: Alarm OFF
Light blue: Function block calculations stopped
81
Section 4-7
Control Screens
Indicator (034)
Click this button to move to the Tuning screen.
See 4-8 Tuning Screens for details.
Ratio Setting (033)
Click this button to move to the Tuning screen.
See 4-8 Tuning Screens for details.
Click this button to
display the Set Label
Dialog Box.
PV numerical
value display
Click this button to display
the Set Label Dialog Box.
SP (Ratio)
Change Button
PV numerical
value display
SP (ratio) numerical
value display
SP (ratio)
position
display
PV bar display
Switch to
Remote Button
HH (High/High Alarm)
H (High Alarm)
PV bar display
Up/Down Buttons to
change SP (ratio)
L (Low Alarm)
Switch to AUTO Button
Switch to MAN Button
PV Bar Display
Displays the PV range from upper to lower limit as a bar.
Green: Status normal
Red: PV Alarm (either HH, H, L, LL)
Blue: Alarm OFF
Light blue: Function block calculations stopped
LL (Low/Low Alarm)
PV Bar Display
Displays the PV range from upper to lower limit as a bar.
Green: Status normal
Red: PV Alarm (either HH, H, L, LL)
Blue: Alarm OFF
Light blue: Function block calculations stopped
Segment Program 2 (157)
High/Low Alarm (111)
Click this button to move to the Tuning screen.
See 4-8 Tuning Screens for details.
Reference input
value display
Program output
numerical value
PV numerical value display
Position of program
output value display
H (High Alarm)
H (High Alarm)
Setting Button
H (High Alarm)
set value
PV bar display
L (Low Alarm)
Setting Button
L (Low Alarm) set value
L (Low Alarm)
Bar display for
reference input
value
Run Command/
Display Button
Stop Command/
Display Button
Step number
executing
PV Bar Display
Displays the PV range from upper to lower limit as a bar.
Green: Status normal
Red: Alarm
Light blue: Function block calculations stopped
82
Move to Next Wait
Command Button
(Red during WAIT)
Move to Next Step
Command Button
Time Axis Hold
Cancel Button
Time Axis Hold Button
Section 4-7
Control Screens
Counter (208)
Timer (205)
Click this button to display
the Set Label Dialog Box.
Click this button to display
the Set Label Dialog Box.
SP (Set Value)
Change Button
Prediction Value
Change Button
Run Command
Button
Stop Command
(Timer Reset)
Button
SP (Set Value)
Change Button
Numerical display of time elapsed
Set value display
Prediction Value
Prediction value display
Change Button
Time unit display
Indicates arrival at
set value
Run Command
Indicates arrival at
Button
prediction value
Stop Command
Operation Restart Button (Counter Reset)
Operation Interrupt Button Button
Indicates arrival at
set value
Indicates arrival at
prediction value
Motor Manipulation (222)
ON/OFF Valve Manipulator (221)
Click this button to display
the Set Label Dialog Box.
Switch to AUTO Button
Count display
Set value display
Prediction value
display
Click this button to display
the Set Label Dialog Box.
CT input
high alarm
Switch to AUTO Button
ON/OFF Buttons
Valve open midway
(U3) indicator
Limit switch closed
indicator
Bar display
for CT input
Switch to MAN Button
Manipulation site (S4)
selection indicator
Indicates when limit
switch is closed (S6)
Valve action time
error (U2) indicator
Answer output
(S5 = OFF)
indicator
ON/OFF Buttons
Switch to MAN Button
Manipulation site (S4)
selection indicator
Answer input
(S5 = ON) indicator
Answer error (U2) indicator
PV Bar Display
Displays the PV range from upper to lower limit as a bar.
Green: Status normal
Red: Alarm (H)
83
Section 4-7
Control Screens
Motor Opening Manipulator (224)
Reversible Motor Manipulator (223)
Click this button to display
the Set Label Dialog Box.
Click this button to display
the Set Label Dialog Box.
SP Change
Button
Opening input numerical
value display
SP numerical value display
H (opening input
high alarm)
H (CT input
high alarm)
Switch to AUTO Button
Bar display
for CT input
Switch to AUTO Button
Displays SP position
FWD/REV/STOP Buttons
FWD/REV/STOP
Buttons
STOP answer
indicator
REV answer
(S9) indicator
Bar display for
opening input
L (opening input
Switch to MAN
low alarm)
Button
Stop
manipulation
Manipulation site (S7)
output display
selection indicator
Close manipulation
FWD answer
output (U2) indicator
(S8) indicator
Answer error (S8) indicator
PV Bar Display
Displays the PV range from upper to lower limit as a bar.
Green: Status normal
Red: Alarm (H)
84
Switch to MAN Button
Manipulation site (S2)
selection indicator
Open manipulation
output (U1) indicator
Thermal relay
(S4) indicator
PV Bar Display
Displays the PV range from upper to lower limit as a bar.
Green: Status normal
Red: Alarm (H)
Section 4-7
Control Screens
4-7-3
Display Examples
Contacts displayed with this graphic can
be used to turn contacts ON and OFF.
Contacts displayed with this graphic only show
ON/OFF status; they cannot be used for operation.
85
Section 4-8
Tuning Screens
4-8
Tuning Screens
Use Tuning Screens, for example, to change Control Block P, I, and D constants, in control blocks.
• You can set the parameters for PID Block P, I, D, and alarm set values.
• You can make adjustments while monitoring PV, SP, and MV trends.
• A maximum of 3,200 screens can be displayed.
• If an alarm occurs, the bar graph color changes.
Use one of the following methods to display the Tuning Screen.
• Select a button to move to the Tuning Screen using the Control Screen.
Refer to 4-7 Control Screens for details.
• Click the button displayed by the Control Screen icon in the Overview
Screen. Refer to 4-5 Overview Screen for details.
A pop-up menu of tag names or a dialog box to specify the tag name will be
displayed if the button on the upper left of an Overview Screen is displayed.
(Refer to 4-6 Screen Configurations.) (Either a pop-up menu or a dialog box
can be selected by clicking the System Info. Button when configuring the
screen and then setting the Auto-start–Tuning screen list setting.
Block name (model)
Target function block
Signal source Function Block or ITEM
Control Block: Basic PID (011), Advanced PID (012), Batch flowrate capture (014), Indication
and Setting (031), Indication and Operation (032), Ratio Setting (033), Indicator (034), blended
PID (013), 2-position ON/OFF (001), 3-position ON/OFF (002), Segment Program 2 (157)
Display
Example:
Basic or Advanced PID
SP, PV, and MV trends
Setting values for P, I, D, and MV limit High/Low, High/High Alarm, High Alarm, Low Alarm,
Low/Low Alarm, and Deviation Alarm.
Alarm OFF switch, Stop block operation command, SP, PV, MV, and A/M status, R/L status
(See note 1.), bar color change if alarm occurs.
Setting values for P, I, D, and MV limit High/Low, High/High Alarm, High Alarm, Low Alarm,
Low/Low Alarm, and Deviation Alarm.
SP, MV (manual mode only), A/M switching (See note 1.), R/L switching (See note 1.).
Settings
Example:
Basic or Advanced PID
Note
1. Same as for Control Screen
2. If using the Tuning Screen, use the 1-Block Send Terminal to Computer
function block (403). tag names specified using the 4-Block Send Terminal
to Computer function block(404) cannot be displayed on the Tuning
Screen.
86
Section 4-8
Tuning Screens
Click the text to display the dialog boxes for changing the settings. You can
make changes uses the ten-key dialog box (using the mouse), or the
keyboard. (The ten-key pad is displayed when you select the Enter box.
Refer to 5-6-3 Ten-key Settings for ten-key/keyboard switching settings.)
Refer to 4-7 Control Screens
for how to operate.
Set operation or alarm to
1 to stop their operation.
Select these buttons to display the dialog boxes for changing the settings.
Click the Time Range Button to set the maximum amplitude for the time axis
displayed on the screen.
The scale can be set to either percentages or engineering units. The setting
can be made by clicking the System Info. Button when configuring the screen
and then setting the Auto-start–Divisions in Tuning screen setting.
To zoom in on the scale displayed, click the Scale Button and change the setting.
To add bias to the display, click the Bias Button and change the setting.
Collection of Trend data for the Tuning Screen starts once you have moved to
the Tuning Screen, and is displayed only while the Tuning Screen is displayed.
To continue to collect trend data even if you then move from the Tuning
Screen to another screen, and to display the data continuously if you return to
the Tuning Screen, click the Continuous Button. In this way, the data from
three screens is collected against the background of the Tuning Screen.
To cancel the Continuous function explained above, click the Cancel button.
87
Section 4-8
Tuning Screens
Note
The display for Segment Program 2 (157) is shown below.
Step settings can be changed by clicking on the word.
Auto-tuning (AT)
It is possible to automatically calculate and store the PID constants used for
Basic PID (011) or Advanced PID (012). This function is called auto-tuning
(AT). For details of the AT function, refer to the section on Basic PID (011) in
the Loop Control Unit Function Block Reference Manual. AT can be set in the
same way as the other settings, as shown below.
1,2,3...
1. If the value for AT displayed in the upper-left region of the Tuning Screen is
0, then AT will not be executed.
2. Click AT.
The Change Data Dialog Box shown below will be displayed.
3. To execute AT, input 1 in the New Data Field.
4. Click the OK Button. AT will be executed (see note). The value for AT displayed in the upper-left region of the Tuning Screen will change to 1.
5. When the PID constants have been calculated and stored and AT has been
completed, the value for AT displayed in the upper-left region of the Tuning
Screen will return to 0.
88
Section 4-8
Tuning Screens
Note
Changing P, I, D
Execution of AT can be cancelled from the above dialog box by inputting 0 in
the New Data Field and clicking the OK Button. (The value for AT displayed in
the upper-left region of the Tuning Screen will return to 0.)
The following example shows how to change P (the proportional band).
1,2,3...
1. Click Proportional Band (P) displayed in the upper center of the screen.
The Change Data Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the Change To Field.
The ten-key dialog box will be displayed as shown.
Note
Refer to 5-6 Labels, Alarm Sounds, and Ten-key Settings for settings to disable the ten-key pad (i.e., to input directly from the keyboard).
3. After using the mouse (or the keyboard) to enter a numerical value, click
the OK Button.
The display will return to the Change Data Dialog Box shown in Step 1.
4. Click the OK Button.
You can change the settings for I (integral time) and D (differential time) in the
same way.
Changing Other Settings
You can use the procedure explained above to change the settings for MV
High/Low Limit, High/High Alarm, High Alarm, Low/Low Alarm, Low Alarm,
and Deviation Alarm in the same way.
Executing Fine Tuning
Fine tuning (FT) can be executed for either Basic PID (011) or Advanced PID
(012). Fine tuning lets the user use fuzzy inferences to set PID constants as
required for more accurate control.
89
Section 4-8
Tuning Screens
1,2,3...
1. Click Execute FT at the upper left portion of the Tuning Screen, as shown
below.
The following FT Execution Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Set the degree of Response improvement, Overshooting control, and
Hunting control to any of the five levels and then click the OK Button. Either one or two of these can be set for one executed, but all three cannot
be set at the same time.
Fine tuning will be executed according to the settings, the resulting PID
constants will be stored automatically, and the new values will be displayed
at the top of the Tuning Screen.
3. Repeat the above process as many times as required to achieve suitable
settings.
4. Click the Undo Button to return to the previous PID constant settings. If the
Undo Button is pressed a second time, the FT settings will be returned to.
Execute fine tuning when the control performance produced by autotuning is
not acceptable, when autotuning produces inconsistency in the PV, or when
you cannot allow control to be interrupted.
Fine tuning uses three user settings for hunting control, overshooting, and
response improvement along with fuzzy inferences from previous control conditions to improve control by automatically setting PID parameters.
Either one or two of the user settings for hunting control, overshooting, and
response improvement can be set to any of five levels. For example, to better
control hunting and overshooting, the Overshoot and Hunting parameters can
be set to the desired levels.
90
Section 4-9
Trend Screens
Overshooting control
For example, hunting control can be
set to level 4 and overshooting
control can be set to 3.
Response improvement
4-9
Hunting control
Trend Screens
Trend Screens display changes in Control Block PV, SP, MV, and analog signals across the passage of time as recording meter images. To display the
Trend Screen, click the Trend Screen Button in the Overview Window.
4-9-1
Real Time Trend Screen Display
The scale of the graph is adjusted to the
set value of the data that is selected.
Click the icon of the desired number to change
the data.
Time Scroll
Shifts one screen
further to the past.
Data values at the point in time displayed by
this mark (the current value for the default)
are displayed in the upper part of the screen.
You can drag this mark to move it about the
screen. All data is displayed as real numbers.
Time Scroll
Shifts one screen
further to the future.
91
Section 4-9
Trend Screens
Function block PV, SP, MV, and analog signals output from the Send Terminal
to Computer function block are collected in fixed cycles, the trend displayed,
and simultaneously stored in a file.
Trends are displayed as multi-dot recorder screen images to a maximum of
eight dots per screen.
The following two Trend Screens are supported.
Item
Type
Realtime Trend
Historical Trend
Data collection
Collection cycle 1, 2, 5, 10, or 30 s
1, 5, 10, 30, or 60 min
(logger function) Tags
480 max.
960 max.
Maximum save Collection cycle
Collection cycle
time
1 s: 10 h
1 min: 30 days
2 s: 20 h
5 min: 150 days
5 s: 50 h
10 min: 300 days
10 s: 100 h
30 min: 900 days
30 s: 300 h
60 min: 1,800 days
Collection cycle
Data display
Horizontal axis Collection cycle
1 min: 2 h to 10 days
1 s: 2 min to 240 min
5 min: 10 h to 50 days
2 s: 4 min to 240 min
10 min: 20 h to 100 days
5 s: 10 min to 240 min
30 min: 60 h to 300 days
10 s: 20 min to 240 min
60 min: 5 days to 600 days
30 s: 20 min to 240 min
Vertical axis
One axis for all 8 points. Scale can be magnified by 1×, 2×, 5×, or 10×.
Display start
Specify the display start time to display data from that point in time.
time
Display colors Red, yellow, green, blue, magenta, purple, cyan, and white
The data collection cycle is set on the System Info Screen. For details on the
data collection cycle, refer to 5-6-9 CSV File Auto-save Settings.
Note
Depending on the number of combined function blocks and the model of Loop
Controller that is connected, it may not be possible to collect the data within
the collection cycle that is set.
If the data is displayed on a graph under these conditions, the data will be
updated with the same values as for the previous collection. To remedy this
situation, take measures such as lengthening the collection cycle interval.
You can register a maximum of 60 Realtime Trend Screens, or 120 Historical
Trend Screens.
Set either Realtime Trend or Historical Trend when configuring the screen.
Regardless of the trend, trend data collection itself starts at the same time as
the monitor process is started (using the Run Button in the Main Window).
• Click the Start Time Button in the lower left of the screen to set the time
from which data will be displayed.
• Click the Maximum Display Time Button to set the maximum width of the
time axis displayed on the screen.
• To zoom in on the scale displayed, click the Scale Button and change the
setting.
• To add bias to the display, click the Bias Button and change the setting.
• Use the Select Pen Button to select the pen you want to display.
92
Section 4-9
Trend Screens
Realtime trends is recorded for the maximum save time (10 to 300 hours),
after which the oldest data is discarded.
Element
Target function
block
Display
Setting
Send source function block, or ITEM
Control Block: PV, SP, MV, Y1, Y2, and HL only for Basic PID (011), Advanced PID (012), Batch flowrate capture (014), Indication and Setting (031), Indication and Operation (032), Ratio Setting (033),
Indicator (034), blended PID (013), 2-position ON/OFF (001), and 3-position ON/OFF (002).
The following for all function blocks:
Analog input signals (Input Selector (Block Model 162))
Analog output signals (Constant Generator (Block Model 166))
Contact input signals or contact output signals for all function blocks, or contact value parameters
(Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) + Internal Switch (Block Model 209))
SP, PV, and MV, analog value, and contact (See note.)
None
Note
4-9-2
MV is displayed as an SP and PV range, not as a percentage.
Historical Trend Screen Display
The scale of the graph is adjusted to the
set value of the data that is selected.
Click the icon of the desired number to change
the data.
Data values at the point in time displayed by
this mark (the current value for the default)
are displayed in the upper part of the screen.
You can drag this mark to move it about the
screen. All data is displayed as real numbers.
Time Scroll
Shifts one screen
further to the past.
CSV File Output
Time Scroll
Shifts one screen
further to the future.
Realtime Trend data and Historical Trend data (data grouped by date, time, or
tag name) can be output in CSV (Comma Separated Value) file format using
the following procedure.
Automatic Saving (Scheduled Saving)
The following settings can be used when configuring screens (i.e., when registering trend screens).
• Automatic save enable
93
Section 4-9
Trend Screens
• Save period (1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 18, 20, 24, 48, 72, 96, 120, or 240 h)
• Save file name and folder
Once automatic saving has been enabled and the monitor process has been
started (by clicking the Run Button in the Main Window or the Run Button in
the Setup Dialog Box), the automatic save function will be started. An CSV file
will be saved periodically on the hour at the specified save period. Refer to
Registering Trend Screens under 5-5 Screen Configuration for details on
automatic save settings.
Manual Saving
Use the following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Press the CSV Button to display the Export to CSV File Dialog Box.
2. Specify a name for the CSV file, and click the OK Button. A CSV file will be
created. (By clicking the Browse Button, the CSV file can be created in a
desired folder. The default filename for Realtime Trend data is Trrl.csv and
the default filename for Historical Trend data is Trhl.csv.) The contents of
CSV files created are as follows:
Realtime Trend
Real-time Trend(carriage return)
<Screen_name>(carriage return)
<Date_exported>(comma)<Time_exported>(carriage return)
(comma)(comma)<Tag_name_1>(comma)<Tag_name_2>(comma)...(comma
)<Tag_name_8>(carriage return)
(comma)(comma)<ITEM_tag_1>(comma)<ITEM_tag_2>(comma)...(comma)
<ITEM_tag_8>(carriage return)
<Date_of_trend_data>(comma)<Time_of_trend_data>(comma)<Data_1>(co
mma)<Data_2>(comma)...(comma)<Data_8>(carriage return)
Note
Data for tag names that have not been registered will be 0.
Historical Trend
Historical Trend(carriage return)
<Screen_name>(carriage return)
<Date_exported>(comma)<Time_exported>(carriage return)
(comma)(comma)<Tag_name_1>(comma)<Tag_name_2>(comma)...(comma
)<Tag_name_8>(carriage return)
(comma)(comma)<ITEM_tag_1>(comma)<ITEM_tag_2>(comma)...(comma)
<ITEM_tag_8>(carriage return)<Date_of_trend_data>(comma)<Time_of_tre
nd_data>(comma)
<Data_1>(comma)<Data_2>(comma)...(comma)<Data_8>(carriage return)
Note
Data for tag names that have not been registered will be 0.
Example: The following screen shows how Realtime Trend data exported
to spreadsheet software (e.g., Microsoft Excel) will be displayed.
94
Section 4-9
Trend Screens
Date exported
Tag name
ITEM tag
Data of trend data
Screen name
Time exported
Time of trend data
ITEM tag data
Changing Pen Settings
Pens can be changed, deleted, or added to Trend Screens without shutting
down the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Changing/Deleting Pens from the Dialog Box
1,2,3...
1. Double-click the pen selection area.
Double-click.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed. Click where indicated by numbers 1 to 4 in the following diagram to set the items.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Tag Name Selection for CSV Tag
Displays a list of tags registered in CX-Process Monitor Plus.
(2) ITEM Tag Selection
Set the type of ITEM to use to narrow the ITEM list displayed for the
tag names above.
95
Section 4-9
Trend Screens
(3) Detailed Settings
When the tag name is set above, the upper/lower limits of the specified
tag will be displayed by default. The setting can be changed.
(4) Delete
Deletes the selected pen.
Note (a) When the Delete Button is pressed in step 4, above, all tag information will be deleted from the Trend Screen, including the graphic display for the pen.
(b) After the four items above are set and the OK Button is clicked,
some time will be required before the results are displayed on the
Trend Screen. This time will be the collection cycle (approximately
10 s for realtime trends and 60 s for historical trends) plus the
screen refresh cycle (a few seconds). If another screen is
switched to, the changes will be reflected in the screen as soon
as it is returned to.
(c) If the scaling settings have been changed using the CX-Process
Tool, change the tag upper and lower limit settings to match the
changed values using the Detail Button in the Update of Pen Information Dialog Box.
Adding Pens from the Dialog Box
Use the following procedure to assign a tag to a pen for which one is not yet
assigned.
1,2,3...
96
1. Double-click in the area circled in the screen shown below.
Section 4-9
Trend Screens
The following dialog box will appear to change the pen.
2. Select a pen to which a tag is not yet assigned and click the OK Button.
3. Assign the pen using the same dialog box as used to change and delete
pens in the previous procedure.
97
Section 4-10
Batch Trend Screens
4-10 Batch Trend Screens
Batch Trend Screens collect changes over time in the control block PV, SP,
MV, and other analog signals, and display them as recording meter images.
Trend data collection can be started and stopped using tag data status as the
trigger.
Collected trend data is automatically saved in a batch trend file.
Past batch data in the batch trend file can be superimposed for display on the
Batch Trend Screen during data collection, and can be output to a CSV file.
The Batch Trend Screen is displayed by clicking the Batch Trend Screen icon
in the Overview Screen.
4-10-1 Batch Trend Screen Display
The scale of the graph is adjusted to the
set value of the data that is selected. To
change the data, click the area where
the pen number is displayed.
Data values (default: present value) at the point
displayed by this mark are displayed in the
upper part of the screen. The mark can be
moved by dragging it.
Press the F5 Key to return the mark to the
present position.
The trend data collection
status is displayed here.
Click here to open the Batch
Collection Status Dialog Box.
The graph vertical axis display
(upper and lower limits and
number of divisions) can be set for
each pen. The tag data display is
also be changed when changing
the selected pen.
References batch trend
files of trend data
collected in the past.
Time Scroll
Shifts one screen
to the past.
Sets the point in
time from which data
is to be displayed.
Note
Sets the maximum width
for the time axis
displayed on the screen.
Used to zoom the
scale of the
display.
Used to add bias
to the display.
Used to select
the pen to be
displayed.
Time Scroll
Shifts one screen to
the future.
The CX-Process Monitor Plus provides the following two types of
screens for data collection in trend graph format.
Use them according to the requirements of the application.
• Trend Screens
• Batch Trend Screens
For details on the differences between Trend Screens and Batch
Trend Screens, refer to Appendix B Differences between Trend
Screens and Batch Trend Screens.
• A recording meter screen image with a maximum of eight points is displayed on one screen.
• A maximum of 120 Batch Trend Screens and 960 tags can be registered.
98
Section 4-10
Batch Trend Screens
• The trend data collection cycle and maximum save time in a Batch Trend
Screen are shown in the following table.
Item
Collection cycle
(See note.)
Maximum save time
Note
Details
1 s, 1 min
4 hours (when collection cycle is 1 s)
10 days (when collection cycle is 1 min)
1. The collection cycle is set using the CRT Builder Dialog Box (Batch Trend
Screen) from the Builder Window. For details on collection cycle settings,
refer to 5-5-2 Overview of Screen Registration.
2. Depending on the number of combined function blocks and the model of
Loop Controller that is connected, it may not be possible to collect the data
within the collection cycle that is set.
If the data is displayed on a graph under these conditions, the data will be
updated with the same values as for the previous collection. To remedy this
situation, take measures such as lengthening the collection cycle interval.
Changing the Vertical Axis
Display
1,2,3...
The display for the batch trend graph vertical axis can be changed for each
pen.
1. Click the Batch Trend Screen data display area.
Click here.
2. With the pen selected, click the vertical axis of the graph.
3. The Vertical Axis Setting Dialog Box will be displayed. Set the vertical axis
display.
Set the upper and lower limits.
Set the number of divisions.
Note
If the scaling settings have been changed using the CX-Process Tool, change
the tag upper and lower limits in the Vertical Axis Setting Dialog Box to match
the new scaling values.
99
Section 4-10
Batch Trend Screens
4-10-2 Collecting and Saving Trend Data
Triggers for Starting
and Ending Trend
Data Collection
There are two ways of starting and ending trend data collection, as described
below.
Trigger Tags
Trigger tags can be used to start and end trend data collection according to
the status of the specified tags.
Set the tags as follows, depending on the type of tag data (contact ITEM or
analog ITEM):
Contact ITEM: Data collection starts and ends according to the ON and
OFF status.
Analog ITEM: Data collection starts when the tag value is equal to or
greater than the batch start value that has been set, and it
ends when the tag value is less than the batch stop value.
Batch Trend Screen Operations
Trend data collection can be started and stopped at any time from the Batch
Trend Screen.
Use the following procedure to start trend data collection.
1,2,3...
1. Click the collection status display area in the Batch Trend Screen.
Click here.
2. The Batch Collection Status Dialog Box will be displayed.
Click the Batch start request Button. (If a trigger tag is set, a batch stop
request can be executed. Even if it is ended, however, data collection will
immediately start when the data collection conditions are satisfied.
Use this operation in cases such as switching to another batch when the
collection conditions are already satisfied.)
Starts trend data collection.
Stops trend data collection.
100
Section 4-10
Batch Trend Screens
Batch Trend Files
When trend data collection (batch) is started, batch trend files (binary format)
are automatically created for each Batch Trend Screen.
File Names
Batch trend files are saved under the following file name for each date.
File name: Starting date - Starting time - Batch Trend Screen name.BTR
Example:
20061201 161510
Starting date
(YYYYMMDD)
Batch1.BTR
Starting time
(HHMMSS)
Batch Trend Screen name
Batch Trend Screen Maximum Save Time
When the maximum save time (4 hours or 10 days) elapses for a Batch Trend
Screen, the batch trend file is no longer updated.
If the collection trigger condition is satisfied, a new batch trend file is created
and trend data collecting is restarted.
Batch Trend File Save Time
A batch trend file is added each time trend data collection is started. A setting
can be made on the System Info Screen so that batch trend files created outside of the regular cycle are automatically deleted. For details on System Info
Screen settings, refer to 5-6-9 CSV File Auto-save Settings.
CX-Process Monitor Plus Starting and Stopping Operations
When the CX-Process Monitor Plus is ended (by ending all CX-Process Monitor Plus modules or by turning OFF the computer), data trace collection is
stopped even if the data collection trigger condition is satisfied.
When the CX-Process Monitor Plus is restarted, the data collection starts
again but the data is collected in a new batch file.
An option can be selected in the CRT Builder Dialog Box (Batch Trend
Screen) from the Builder Window to enable trend data to continue to be collected in the same batch trend file as when the CX-Process Monitor Plus was
stopped.
Select this option.
101
Section 4-10
Batch Trend Screens
Difference in Batch Trend File Creation Method by Selecting Continue Previous batch when restarted Option
CX-Process Monitor Plus stopped.
Trend data collection
status
CX-Process Monitor Plus started.
Trend data collection A
Trend data collection B
Condition satisfied
Data collection
trigger condition
Batch trend file A
When Continue previous batch
when restarted is selected.
(See notes 1 and 2.)
Missing data is added.
Batch trend file B
When Continue previous batch
when restarted is not selected.
Batch trend file B
A new batch trend file is
created.
Note
1. Even if this option is selected, saving will not be continued if the restart time
exceeds the Batch Trend Screen maximum save time.
Example: 1-s Collection Cycle
Elapsed time (hours) 0
1
2
3
CX-Process Monitor
Plus stopped.
Trend data
collection status
Trend data collection A
4
5
6
7
8
CX-Process Monitor
Plus started.
Trend data collection B
Missing data is added.
Batch trend file A
Batch trend file
creation status
Batch trend file B
Batch Trend Screen
maximum save time (4 hrs)
A new batch trend file is
created.
2. If the trend data collection trigger condition becomes satisfied while the
CX-Process Monitor Plus is stopped, the CX-Process Monitor Plus will not
recognize it.
If the trend data trigger condition is satisfied when the CX-Process Monitor
Plus is restarted and if the Continue previous batch when restarted option
is selected, the data will be saved in the same batch trend file as when the
previous CX-Process Monitor Plus was stopped.
3. For details on Builder Window CRT Dialog Box (Batch Trend Screen) settings, refer to 5-5-2 Overview of Screen Registration.
Referencing Past
Trend Data
102
Trend data collected in the past is saved as batch trend files. These files can
be displayed on Batch Trend Screens.
Section 4-10
Batch Trend Screens
Procedure for Referencing
Past Trend Data
1,2,3...
Trend data collected in the past can be checked on a Batch Trend Screen.
1. Click the Browse Button at the top of the Batch Trend Screen to display
the Select File Dialog Box.
Click here.
2. In the Select file Dialog Box, select the batch trend file that is to be referenced.
Select the year in
which the batch trend
file to be referenced
was collected.
Select the date on which
the batch trend file to be
referenced was
collected.
The batch trend files collected on the same day
are displayed.
Select the one to be referenced.
When a batch trend file is selected,
detailed information on that file is
displayed here.
3. The status of the selected batch trend file will be displayed on the Batch
Trend Screen.
The display on the Batch Trend Screen while the batch trend file is being
referenced will be as shown below.
An asterisk is
displayed next to the
pen number.
The time and the elapsed time are displayed
for the batch trend file collection for the
selected pen.
Indicates that
referencing is
in progress.
4. To end the batch trend file reference status, click the Browse Button to display the Browse File Dialog Box and select the Browse collecting data option.
The batch trend file reference status will be ended when moving to another
screen.
103
Section 4-10
Batch Trend Screens
Overlaying Past and
Currently Collected Trend
Data
1,2,3...
Past and present trend data collection can be compared in pen units.
1. Click the pen number for the past trend data to be displayed.
Click here.
2. The Pen Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Select Browse past data
and click the Select Data Button.
The selected pen
number is
displayed here.
Click here.
Select this option.
Batch trend file
details are displayed
here.
The display position
for the selected pen
can be shifted in time
units
3. The Select data Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the tag data to be displayed.
Select the date on
which the batch trend
file to be referenced
was collected.
The batch trend files collected on the
same day are displayed.
Select the one to be referenced.
Tag names included in the selected
batch trend file are displayed here.
Select the tag data to be displayed.
Select the year in
which the batch trend
file to be referenced
was collected.
When a batch trend file is selected,
detailed information on that file is
displayed here.
104
Section 4-10
Batch Trend Screens
4. The status of the past batch trend files for the selected pen will be displayed. While a batch trend file is being referenced, the Batch Trend
Screen will appear as shown below.
The time and the elapsed time are displayed for
the batch trend file collection for the selected pen.
Note
An asterisk is displayed next to the
pen number where the past batch
trend file is being referenced.
Use the time shift setting in the Pen Settings Dialog Box to shift the graph for
past and currently collected trend data as shown below.
The time for starting
the data collection is
shifted.
The data collection start times
are matched using the time
shift function.
: Past trend data
: Currently collected trend data
5. To end the batch trend file reference status, click the Browse Button to display the Pen Settings Dialog Box and select the Browse collecting data option.
The batch trend file reference status will be ended when moving to another
screen.
CSV File Output
Data collected using the Batch Trend Screen (data grouped by date, time, or
tag number) can be output in CSV (Comma Separated Values) file format
either automatically or manually.
Automatic Saving
The following settings are used when configuring screens (i.e., when registering trend screens).
• Automatic save enable
• Save filter name and save destination folder
The CSV file is automatically saved according to these settings when trend
data collection stops (when the trigger tag condition is not satisfied, or when a
batch stop is requested manually).
105
Section 4-10
Batch Trend Screens
Manual Saving (Saving by
Using Buttons)
1,2,3...
Use the following procedure.
1. Press the CSV Button in the Batch Trend Screen to display the CSV export
Dialog Box.
2. Select the batch trend file to export.
3. Specify a name for the CSV file and click the OK Button. The CSV file will
be created.
(The file can be created in a specified folder by clicking the Browse Button.
The default file name is the name of the batch trend file with a CSV file
name extension.)
CSV File Specifications
Batch trend (comma) Version (carriage return)
Screen name text string (carriage return)
Output time (comma) Output date data (comma) Output time data (carriage
return)
Start time (comma) Batch start date data (comma) Batch start time data (carriage return)
Finish time (comma) Batch finish date data (comma) Batch finish time data
(carriage return)
(comma) (comma) (comma) Tag name 1 (comma) Tag name 2 (comma)
···(comma) Tag name 8 (carriage return)
Date (comma) Time (comma) Elapsed time (comma) ITEM tag 1 (comma)
ITEM tag 2 (comma) ···(comma) ITEM tag 8 (carriage return)
Data date (comma) Data time (comma) Data 1 (comma) Data 2 (comma)
···(comma) Data 8 (carriage return)
Note
Data will not be displayed for unregistered tag numbers.
Example: When an Output CSV File Is Read Using Spreadsheet Software
Screen name
Export time
Batch start and finish times
Tag name
ITEM tag
ITEM tag data
Trend data realtime
Time elapsed from batch start time
106
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
4-11 Segment Program 2 Screens
Operations such as monitoring operating conditions and setting step data for
a Segment Program 2 (Block Model 157) function block can be executed
using Segment Program 2 Screens. The monitored segment data can be
automatically saved in a Segment Program 2 trend file.
Segment Program 2 trend files can be used to display previously collected
segment data on Segment Program 2 Screens and to output the previous
data to CSV files. The Segment Program 2 Screens are displayed by clicking
the Segment Program 2 icon on the Overview Screen.
4-11-1 Overview
The Segment Program 2 Screens consists of the Segment Program 2 Monitor
Screen and the Segment Program 2 Edit Screen, as shown below.
Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen
Overview Screen
Segment Program 2 step data set values, program output present values, and reference input
present values are displayed on a trend graph.
• Controls Segment Program 2 graphs and monitors operating status.
• References previously collected Segment Program 2 segment data.
Click to go to the
Segment Program
2 Edit Screen.
Segment Program 2 Edit Screen
Edit Segment Program 2 steps.
• Read, set, and write the relevant Segment Program 2 steps.
Click to go to the
Segment Program
2 Monitor Screen.
• A maximum of 16 pairs of Segment Program 2 Edit Screens can be registered.
• The above screen names will be used in the descriptions from here
onwards.
107
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
4-11-2 Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen Examples and Operations
Segment Program 2 present values are displayed in a trend graph.
Click to display details for any step.
Steps being executed are displayed in
green.
Shows segment data collection status.
Click to display the Collection Status Monitor Dialog
Box.
The following displays will be shown for
the Segment Program 2 status.
• WAIT: Waiting
• GOAL: Segment finished
• Input error: An input error occurred.
Click to move to the Segment
Program 2 Edit Screen.
Click to browse Segment
Program 2 trend files
collected previously.
Used to change the following parameter settings.
• Stop block operation command (ITEM 000)
• Reference input disable (ITEM 020)
Data values (default: present values) at the point
displayed by this mark are displayed in the frame.
The mark can be moved by dragging it with the
cursor.
Press the F5 Key to return the mark to the present
position.
The graph vertical axis display (upper and lower
limits and division number) can be set for each
selected tag (Segment Program 2 tags or optional
tags).
The faceplate for the
Segment Program 2 block
is displayed.
For details on the faceplate,
refer to 4-7-2 Basic
Displays and Operations.
Horizontal axis display
Top line: Hour and minutes
Bottom line: Day
Time scroll
Shifts one half screen
to the past.
Sets the time from
which data will be
displayed.
Sets the maximum
width for the time axis
displayed on the screen.
Used to zoom the
scale displayed.
Used to add bias to
the display.
Used to select the
pen to be displayed.
Time scroll
Shifts one half screen
to the future.
Data That Can Be Monitored on the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen
The following data can be displayed simultaneously on the Segment Program
2 Monitor Screen.
Data
Step data
Color of line on graph
Yellow
Program output Y1 Light blue
(ITEM 008)
Reference input X1 Green
(ITEM 007)
Optional tag
Purple
Note
108
Details
Step data in the Loop Controller is displayed on the screen
in advance, overlapping other
tag values.
----Specify any tag
Step Data Display
When the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen is displayed first, the step data
is not displayed. (Step data is displayed by starting segment data collection.)
To check in advance the step data executed on the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen, move to the Segment Program 2 Edit Screen.
With the move to the Segment Program 2 Edit Screen, new Segment Program
2 step data is received from the Loop Controller and the display is updated on
the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen.
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
Segment Program 2 Collection Cycles and Maximum Save Times
The following table shows the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen data collection cycles and maximum save times.
Item
Collection cycle
(See note.)
Maximum save time
Note
Details
1 s, 10 s, 1 min
3 days (Collection cycle: 1 s)
30 days (Collection cycle: 10 s)
180 days (Collection cycle: 1 min)
1. The collection cycle is set using the CRT Builder Dialog Box (Segment Program 2 Screen) from the Builder Window. For details on collection cycle
settings, refer to 5-5-2 Overview of Screen Registration.
2. Depending on the number of combined function blocks and the model of
Loop Controller that is connected, it may not be possible to collect the data
within the collection cycle that is set. If the data is displayed on a graph under these conditions, the data will be updated with the same values as for
the previous collection. To remedy this situation, take measures such as
lengthening the collection cycle interval.
Segment Data Collection Starting and Stopping
When the monitored Segment Program 2 Block S1 (ITEM 013) turns ON, data
collection starts. When it turns OFF, data collection stops.
When segment data collection is started, Segment Program 2 trend files are
automatically created in binary format for each Segment Program 2 Screen.
Note
Start the CX-Process Monitor Plus before starting to run Segment Program 2.
If it is started after the CX-Process Monitor Plus, the step data may not match
the monitored program output display.
Segment Program 2 Status Display
Segment Program 2 status is displayed at the upper right of the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen.
There are three types of status display, as shown below.
Displayed when U10 Waiting (ITEM 019) in the Segment Program 2 block turns ON.
Displayed when U2 Arrival at Final Segment (ITEM 016) in the Segment Program 2 block turns ON.
Displayed when U1 X1 Input Error (ITEM 015) in the Segment Program 2 block turns ON.
109
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
Checking Step Data
1,2,3...
1. Click the step data section in the table.
Click here.
2. The Display Steps Dialog Box will be displayed.
Set values cannot be changed from this dialog box. To change set values,
use the Segment Program 2 Edit Screen.
Displays the
previous step
data.
Displays the next
step data.
Changing the Vertical Axis
Display
1,2,3...
The Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen vertical axis display can be changed
for each Segment Program 2 tag or optional tag.
1. Click the data display area of the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen.
Click to change the vertical axis display for
a Segment Program 2 tag.
Click to change the vertical axis display for
an optional tag.
2. With the data display area selected, double-click the vertical axis of the
graph.
110
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
3. The Vertical axis settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Set the vertical axis
display.
Set the upper and lower limits.
Set the number of divisions.
Note
Changing Parameters
When changing the scaling settings in the CRT Builder's Segment Program 2
settings screen, change the upper and lower limit settings in the Vertical axis
settings Dialog Box to match the new scaling values.
Change the following parameters for the Segment Program 2 Function Block.
• Stop block operation command (ITEM 000)
• Reference input disable (ITEM 020)
1,2,3...
1. Click the Stop Block and Reference Buttons in the Segment Program 2
Monitor Screen.
Click to change the value of the
Stop Block command (MF_ST).
Click to change the value of the
Reference Input Disable Switch (S5).
2. The Change data Dialog Box will be displayed. Input the new value.
Input the new value here.
In this example, the dialog box for
the Stop Block command (MF_ST)
is shown.
3. Click the OK Button. The new value will be reflected in the parameters for
the Segment Program 2 Function Block.
111
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
Segment Program 2
Trend Files
When Segment Program 2 data collection starts (i.e., when S1, ITEM 013,
turns ON), Segment Program 2 trend files are automatically created in binary
format for each Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen.
File Names
Segment Program 2 trend files are saved under the following file name for
each date.
File name: Starting date - Starting time - Segment Program 2 Screen
name.157
Example:
20061201 161510
Starting date
(YYYYMMDD)
Segment.157
Starting time
(HHMMSS)
Segment Program 2 Screen name
Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen Maximum Save Time
When the maximum save time (3, 30, or 180 days) has elapsed for a Segment
Program 2 Monitor Screen, the Segment Program 2 trend file is no longer
updated.
If S1 (ITEM 013) for the Segment Program 2 Block is ON, a new Segment
Program 2 trend file is created and segment data collection is restarted.
Segment Program 2 Trend File Save Cycles
A Segment Program 2 trend file is added each time segment data collection is
started.
A setting can be made on the System Info Screen so that Segment Program 2
trend files created outside of the regular cycle are automatically deleted.
For details on the System Info Screen, refer to 5-6-9 CSV File Auto-save Settings.
Starting and Stopping CX-Process Monitor Plus Operation
When the CX-Process Monitor Plus is stopped (either by stopping all CX-Process Monitor Plus modules or by turning OFF the computer), the segment
data collection is stopped even if S1 (ITEM 013) of the Segment Program 2
Block is ON.
When the CX-Process Monitor Plus is restarted, the data collection starts
again, but the data is collected in a new Segment Program 2 trend file.
An option in the CRT Builder Dialog Box option (Segment Program 2 Screen)
from the Builder Window can be selected to enable segment data to continue
to be collected in the Segment Program 2 trend file from when the CX-Process Monitor Plus was stopped.
Select this option.
112
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
Difference in Segment Program 2 File Creation Method by Selecting Continue
previous segment trend when restarted Option
CX-Process Monitor Plus stopped.
Segment data
collection status
CX-Process Monitor Plus started.
Segment data collection A
Segment data collection B
Condition satisfied
Data collection
trigger condition
When Continue previous segment
trend when restarted is selected.
(See note 1.)
Segment Program 2 trend
file A
Missing data is added.
Segment Program 2 trend
file A
Segment Program 2 trend
file B
When Continue previous segment
trend when restarted is not selected.
A new Segment Program 2
trend file is created.
Note
1. Even if this option is selected, saving will not be continued if the restart time
exceeds the Segment Program 2 Screen maximum save time.
Example: 1-s Collection Cycle
Elapsed time (days) 0
1
2
CX-Process Monitor Plus stopped.
Segment data
collection status
Segment data collection A
3
4
5
6
CX-Process Monitor Plus started.
Segment data collection B
Missing data is added.
Segment Program 2 Trend file A
Segment Program 2
trend file creation
status
Segment Program 2
Trend file B
Segment Program 2
Screen maximum
save time (3 days)
A new Segment Program
2 trend file is created.
2. If S1 in the Segment Program 2 Block changes from ON to OFF while the
CX-Process Monitor Plus is stopped, the CX-Process Monitor Plus will not
recognize it.
If S1 of the Segment Program 2 Block is ON when the CX-Process Monitor
Plus is restarted, and if the Continue previous segment trend when restarted option is selected, the data will be saved in the same Segment Program
2 trend file as when the previous CX-Process Monitor Plus was stopped.
3. For details on Builder Window CRT Dialog Box (Segment Program 2
Screen) settings, refer to 5-5-2 Overview of Screen Registration.
Referencing Past
Segment Data
Segment data collected in the past is saved as Segment Program 2 trend
files.
These files can be displayed on Segment Program 2 Monitor Screens.
113
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
1,2,3...
1. Click the Browse Button at the top of the Segment Program 2 Monitor
Screen to display the Select trend file Dialog Box.
Click here.
2. In the Select trend file Dialog Box, select the Segment Program 2 trend file
that is to be referenced.
Select the year in which
the Segment Program 2
trend file to be
referenced was collected.
Select the date on which
the Segment Program 2
trend file to be referenced
was collected.
The Segment Program 2 trend files collected
on the same day are displayed.
Select the one to be referenced.
When a Segment Program 2 trend file is selected, detailed information on that
file is displayed here.
3. The status of the selected Segment Program 2 trend file will be displayed
on the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen.
The display on the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen while the Segment
Program 2 trend file is being referenced will be as shown below.
Indicates that
referencing is
in progress.
The faceplate and status
displays are not shown.
4. To end the Segment Program 2 trend file reference status, click the
Browse Button to display the Select trend file Dialog Box and select the
Browse collecting data option.
The Segment Program 2 trend file reference status will be ended when
moving to another screen.
114
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
Note
Changing the Segment Program 2 Screen Name
If the name of a Segment Program 2 Screen is changed using the Builder
Window CRT Builder Dialog Box (Segment Program 2 Screen), Segment Program 2 trend files created by data collection prior to the change can no longer
be referenced.
CSV File Output
Data collected using the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen (data grouped
by date, time, or tag number) can be output in CSV (Comma Separated Values) file format either automatically or manually.
Automatic Saving
The following settings are used when configuring screens (i.e., when registering Segment Program 2 Screens).
• Automatic save enable
• Save filter name and save destination folder
The CSV file is automatically saved according to these settings when segment data collection stops (when S1 turns OFF).
Manual Saving (Saving by
Using Buttons)
1,2,3...
Use the following procedure.
1. Press the CSV Button in the Segment Program 2 Monitor Screen to display
the CSV export Dialog Box.
2. Select the Segment Program 2 trend file to export.
3. Specify a name for the CSV file and click the OK Button. The CSV file will
be created.
(The file can be created in a specified folder by clicking the Browse Button.
The default file name is “Segment_Program_2_trend_file_name.CSV.”)
CSV File Specifications
Segment Program 2 trend (comma) Version (carriage return)
Screen name text string (carriage return)
Output time (comma) Output date data (comma) Output time data (carriage
return) (carriage return)
Step (comma) Step time (comma) Time unit (comma) Program output value
(comma) Output value unit (comma) Wait time (comma) Time unit (comma)
Wait width (comma) Wait width unit (carriage return)
0 (comma) Step 0 output value data (carriage return)
1 (comma) Step 1 step time data (comma) Step 1 time unit data (comma)
Step 1 program output value data (comma) Step 1 output value unit data
(comma) Step 1 wait time data (comma) Step 1 wait time unit data (comma)
Step 1 wait width data (comma) Step 1 wait width unit data (carriage return)
:
(Continued to step 30.)
:
115
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
(carriage return)
Start time (comma) Data collection start date data (comma) Data collection
start time data (carriage return)
Finish time (comma) Data collection finish date data (comma) Data finish time
data (carriage return)
(comma) (comma) (comma) Segment Program 2 tag name (comma) Segment Program 2 tag name (comma) Optional tag name (carriage return)
Date (comma) Time (comma) Elapsed time (comma) X1 (comma) Y1
(comma) Optional tag ITEM name (carriage return)
Data date (comma) Data time (comma) Data for time elapsed since batch
start (comma) Data 1 (comma) Data 2 (comma) Data 3 (carriage return)
Note
Data will not be displayed for unregistered tag numbers.
Also, if the data in a single CSV file exceeds 65,000 lines, another CSV file
will be created. The CSV files will be saved with “_01.CSV,” “_02.CSV,” etc.,
added at the end of the filename.
Example: When an Output CSV File Is Read Using Spreadsheet Software
Screen name
Export time
Segment Program 2
step information
Data collection start and finish times
Tag name
ITEM tag
Trend data realtime
ITEM tag data
(X1, Y1, and optional tag data for Segment Program 2)
Time elapsed from batch start time
116
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
4-11-3 Segment Program 2 Edit Screen Display Examples and
Operations
Segment data for the relevant Segment Program 2 Block can be set while
observing actual segment status in realtime, and the settings can be transferred to the Loop Controller.
Click to display the dialog box for
editing data for each step.
Shows segment data collection status.
Click to display the Collection Status Monitor Dialog Box.
Click to move to the Segment
Program 2 Monitor Screen.
Reads Segment
Program 2 step data
from the Controller.
Writes to the Controller
the step data set on
the Segment Program
2 Edit Screen
Time scroll
Shifts one half screen
to the past.
Note
Sets the time from
which data will be
displayed.
Sets the maximum width
for the time axis displayed on the screen.
Used to zoom the
scale displayed.
Used to add bias to
the display.
Time scroll
Shifts one half screen
to the future.
The following dialog box will be displayed if step data registered in the Loop
Controller is updated when the Segment Program 2 Edit Screen is displayed.
Click the Yes Button to update the step data.
Editing Step Data
1,2,3...
1. Click the step area at the top of the Segment Program 2 Edit Screen.
Click the step to be
edited.
Click to set the initial
values.
117
Section 4-11
Segment Program 2 Screens
2. The Step Settings Dialog Box will be displayed.
Input the values to be set for each step and click the Change Button.
The graph display will be updated at that point, but the new settings will not
be sent to the Loop Controller.
The number of the step to be edited is
displayed here. (Step 0 is displayed as
the initial value.)
Moves to the edit screen
for the previous step.
The step data prior to editing
is displayed here.
Reflects the changed data in the
graph display.
Input the new values.
Moves to the edit screen
for the next step.
3. After the changes have been completed, click the Close Button to close
the Step Settings Dialog Box.
Transferring Edited Step
Data to the Loop
Controller
Use the following procedure to transfer the step data edited on the Segment
Program 2 Edit Screen to the Loop Controller.
!WARNING Transferring segment data while the Segment Program 2 function block or
function blocks that are affected by Segment Program 2 outputs are running
may affect the outputs from these function blocks.
Transferring data without first confirming the results may cause unexpected
operation of the controlled equipment.
1,2,3...
1. Click the Write Button on the Segment Program 2 Edit Screen.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Confirm the effects of writing the step data, and then click the Yes Button
to start the transfer.
Reading Step Data from
the Loop Controller
1,2,3...
118
Use the following procedure to read the step data currently registered to the
Loop Controller.
1. Click the Read Button on the Segment Program 2 Edit Screen.
Section 4-12
Graphic Screens
2. If step data has been edited on this screen, the following dialog box will be
displayed. Click the OK Button to delete the step data edited on this screen
and to use the step data read from the Loop Controller.
3. The step data will be read from the Loop Controller and will be reflected on
the Segment Controller 2 Edit Screen.
4-12 Graphic Screens
Graphic Screens display the status of the system or device in graphic form. To
display the Graphic Screen, click the Graphic Screen Icon in the Overview
Screen.
Graphic Screen
Paste to the screen graphic elements representing plant instrumentation,
which have been provided, and use them to display the device status, to a
maximum of 200 screens.
Library figures and images: Text, lines, rectangles, round rectangles (rectangles with rounded corners), ellipses, polygons, and images
Library Functional Objects
Fixed graphic display elements:
Text boxes, instruments, thermometers, transmitters, and orifices
Changeable graphic display elements:
Analog inputs: Bar graph displays, numerical value displays, and tanks
Analog settings: Numerical settings (See note.)
Contact inputs (display): Pumps, valves, and pipes
Contact settings (operation): Switches (See note.)
Screen display objects:
Screen jump objects, FP switch (faceplate pop-up) objects
Note
If making analog values or contact settings, use tags for Constant Generator
(Block Model 166) and Internal Switch (Block Model 209).
119
Section 4-13
Annunciator Screens
Element
Function block
Display
Setting
Function block or ITEM set as send source
Control Blocks: Basic PID (011), Advanced PID (012), Blended PID (Block Model 013), Batch Flowrate Capture (Block Model 014), Indication and Setting (031), Indication and Operation (032), Ratio
Setting (033), Indicator (034), 2-position ON/OFF (001), 3-position ON/OFF (002)
Operation Blocks: High/Low Alarm (111), Segment Program 2 (157), ON/OFF Value Manipulator
(221), Motor Manipulator (222), Reversible Motor Manipulator (223), Motor Opening Manipulator
(224), Timer (205), Counter (208)
The following for all function blocks:
Analog input signals (Input Selector (Block Model 162))
Analog output signals (Constant Generator (Block Model 166))
Contact input signals or contact output signals for all function blocks, or contact value parameters
(Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) + Internal Switch (Block Model 209))
Analog values: Bar graphs, numerical values, tank level
Contacts: Indicators, pumps, valves, pipes
Analog values: Numerical values (using Constant Generator (Block Model 166))
Contacts: Switches (using Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) + Internal Switch (Block Model
209))
4-13 Annunciator Screens
Annunciator Screens display comprehensively the contacts status (mainly the
alarm status). To display the Annunciator Screen, click the Annunciator
Screen icon on the Overview Screen.
Switch screens using this button.
If an error occurs, the Error Display Panel
and Screen Switching Button will both flash.
Resets the error display panel
when an alarm has occurred.
Sets the error display panel to
checked status (lit) when an alarm
has occurred.
The display of the error display
panel will be reset if the alarm has
been cleared (contact OFF status).
There are no particular limits to contacts that can be specified. Basically, however, register contacts that display the alarm status of the Control Block’s HH
(High/High Alarm), H (High Alarm), L (Low Alarm), and LL (Low/Low Alarm),
etc.
If an alarm/error occurs, the icon color will change and a beep will sound. At
the same time, two rows of eight wide-size characters making a user-registered message can be displayed.
You can display a total of 16 separate elements per screen as 4 rows × 4 columns, to a maximum of five screens.
120
Section 4-14
Operation Guide Screens
Element
Target function
block
Display
Setting
Send source Function Block, or ITEM
Control Blocks: PV, SP, and MV only for Basic PID (011), Advanced PID (012), Blended PID (Block
Model 013), Batch Flowrate Capture (Block Model 014), Indication and Setting (031), Indication and
Operation (032), Ratio Setting (033), Indicator (034), 2-position ON/OFF (001), and 3-position ON/
OFF (002).
Operation Blocks: High/Low Alarm (111), Segment Program 2(157), ON/OFF Valve Manipulator
(221), Motor Manipulator (222), Reversible Motor Manipulator (223), Motor Opening Manipulator
(224), Timer (205), Counter (208)
Contact input signals or contact output signals for all function blocks, or contact value parameters
(Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) + Internal Switch (Block Model 209))
Color, sound, and messages displayed when contact is ON.
None
4-14 Operation Guide Screens
Operation Guide Screens display messages registered when the contact signal was turned ON. To display the Operation Guide Message Screen, click the
Operation Guide Button.
When the specified contact (internal switch, etc.) is turned ON, the pre-prepared wide-size character message (54 wide characters) will be displayed
together with the time the contact was turned ON. (When the contact is turned
ON, a red mark will be displayed next to the Operation Guide icon on the
Overview Screen.)
Possible No. of registrations: 1,000 messages max.
Message colors: 16 colors, displayed with sound.
You can display a message with a maximum of 1,000 elements on one
screen.
121
Operation Guide Screens
Element
Target function
block
Display
Setting
Section 4-14
Send source Function Block, or ITEM
Control Blocks: PV, SP, and MV only for Basic PID (011), Advanced PID (012), Blended PID (Block
Model 013), Batch Flowrate Capture (Block Model 014), Indication and Setting (031), Indication and
Operation (032), Ratio Setting (033), Indicator (034), 2-position ON/OFF (001), and 3-position ON/
OFF (002).
Operation Blocks: High/Low Alarm (111), Segment Program 2 (157), ON/OFF Value Manipulator
(221), Motor Manipulator (222), Reversible Motor Manipulator (223), Motor Opening Manipulator
(224), Timer (205), Counter (208)
Contact input signals or contact output signals for all function blocks, or contact value parameters
(Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) + Internal Switch (Block Model 209))
Color, sound, and messages displayed when contact is ON.
None
CSV File Output
Operation Guide message data (date, time, contents of Operation Guide) can
be output in CSV (Comma Separated Value) file format using the following
procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Press the CSV Button to display the Export to CSV File Dialog Box.
2. Specify a name for the CSV file, and click the OK Button. A CSV file will be
created. (By clicking the Browse Button, the CSV file can be created in a
desired folder. The default filename is Opglog.csv.) The contents of CSV
files created are as follows:
Operation Guide Message Log (carriage return)
<Screen_name>(carriage return)
<Date_exported>(comma)<Time_exported>(carriage return)
<Date_of_Operation_Guide>(comma)<Time_of_Operation_Guide>(comma)<Registered_Message>(carriage return)
122
Section 4-15
Alarm Log Screens
4-15 Alarm Log Screens
Alarm Log Screens display alarm logs. To display the Alarm Log Screen, click
the Alarm Button.
The targets monitored for alarms are as follows: Control Block’s HH (High/
High Alarm), H (High Alarm), L (Low Alarm), LL (Low/Low Alarm), and DA
(Deviation Alarm) contacts, and other contact signals (including parameters).
Display all
Display only LIGHT (Light alarm),
H (High alarm), or L (Low alarm)
Display only current errors
Display only HEAVY (Heavy alarm), HH (High/High alarm), or LL (Low/Low alarm)
Save and display comprehensively alarm records (time error occurred, Tag
name, current value when PV or MV occurred, alarm type, etc.) occurring
from the Controller and Alarm Blocks.
You can display a maximum of 1,000 alarm messages on one screen.
Element
Function block
Display
Setting
Function block or ITEM set as send source
Control Blocks: High/High alarm, High alarm, Low alarm, Low/Low alarm, and Deviation alarm for
Basic PID (011), Advanced PID (012), Blended PID (Block Model 013), Batch Flowrate Capture
(Block Model 014), Indication and Setting (031), Indication and Operation (032), Ratio Setting (033),
Indicator (034), 2-position ON/OFF (001), and 3-position ON/OFF (002), Segment Program 2 (157),
ON/OFF Value Manipulator (221), Motor Manipulator (222), Reversible Motor Manipulator (223),
Motor Opening Manipulator (224).
Contact input signals or contact output signals for all function blocks, or contact value parameters
(Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) + Internal Switch (Block Model 209))
Alarm history (date and time of occurrence, and value when alarm occurred)
Time of occurrence: Red; Time of recovery: Black
None
CSV File Output
Alarm log data (date, time, tag names, current value when alarm occurred,
type of alarm) can be output in CSV (Comma Separated Value) file format
using the following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Press the CSV Button to display the Export to CSV File Dialog Box.
123
Section 4-16
Operation Log Screens
2. Specify a name for the CSV file, and click the OK Button. A CSV file will be
created. (By clicking the Browse Button, the CSV file can be created in a
desired folder. The default filename is Almlog.csv.) The contents of CSV
files created are as follows:
Alarm Log (carriage return)
<Date_exported>(comma)<Time_exported>(carriage return)
<Alarm_date>(comma)<Alarm_time>(comma)<Tag_name>(comma)
<Comment>(comma)<Data_when_a_PV_or_MV_error_occurs>(comma)
<Unit>(comma)<Alarm_type>(carriage return)
Example: The following screen shows how alarm log data exported to
spreadsheet software (e.g., Microsoft Excel) will be displayed.
Date exported
Date of alarm
Time of
alarm
Tag
name
Comment
Unit
Alarm type
Data when a PV or
MV error occurs
4-16 Operation Log Screens
Operation Log Screens display operation logs. To display the Operation Log
Screen, click the Operation Log Button.
Save and display comprehensively records (time and date operation occurred,
Tag name, ITEM data before change, ITEM data after change, etc.) of ITEM
data changed within the Loop Control Unit, using the Control Screen or the
Tuning Screen.
Operations using Graphic Screen data elements and switch elements are
saved as operation logs and displayed together.
You can display a maximum of 1,000 operation messages on one screen.
124
Section 4-17
System Monitor Screens
CSV File Output
Operation log data (date, time, contents of operation) can be output in CSV
(Comma Separated Value) file format using the following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Press the CSV Button to display the Export to CSV File Dialog Box.
2. Specify a name for the CSV file, and click the OK Button. A CSV file will be
created. (By clicking the Browse Button, the CSV file can be created in a
desired folder. The default filename is Ctllog.csv.) The contents of CSV
files created are as follows:
Operation Log (carriage return)
<Screen_name>(carriage return)
<Date_exported>(comma)<Time_exported>(carriage return)
<Operation_date>(comma)<Operation_time>(comma)
<Tag_name>(comma)<Comment>(comma)<ITEM_name>(comma)
<ITEM_data_after_changes>(comma)
<ITEM_data_before_changes>(comma)<Unit>(carriage return)
Example: The following screen shows how operation log data exported to
spreadsheet software (e.g., Microsoft Excel) will be displayed.
Date exported
Date of operation
Time of
Tag names Comments
operation
ITEM names
ITEM data
after changes
Unit
ITEM data
before changes
4-17 System Monitor Screens
4-17-1 System Monitor Screen Outline
System Monitor Screen display the system status, and runs/stops the Loop
Control Unit/Board. To display the System Monitor Screen, click the System
Monitor Button.
You can display and operate the following items.
Display/operation
Item
Display
All system allocations
All CPU Unit modes
All Loop Control Unit/Board statuses (run/stop)
Block errors (Execution errors, RAM checksum errors, battery
errors)
Type of connection to computer (CLK, Ethernet, serial), and
connection status (OK, error)
Operation
Loop Control Unit/Board run/stop
Note
The system status display on the System Monitor Screen depends on the settings made in the System Monitor Setting Window (using the System Monitor
Builder Button in the Setup Dialog Box).
125
Section 4-17
System Monitor Screens
Select a number to display the run/stop command for the relevant Loop
Control Unit/Board. Refer to 4-17-2 Loop Control Unit/Board Run/Stop in this
manual for operation details.
Click the M Button to display the CPU Unit's operation mode.
Displays 1
node
Click the E Button to display the Function Block Error dialog box. Refer to 4-17-4
Function Block Error Dialog Box Operations for details.
Shows the computer connected
to the CPU Unit.
Displays the connection type.
Displays the connection status
4-17-2 Loop Control Unit/Board Run/Stop
!WARNING Before starting a Loop Control Unit, check the following points.
• Make sure that I/O Units used in combination are correctly mounted. Also,
make sure that the Unit number on the front of analog I/O Units agree with
the Unit number set using the field terminals. If the Unit numbers do not
agree, I/O (i.e., read and write) will be performed incorrectly, with data for
another Special I/O Unit (with the Unit number set using the field terminal).
• Make sure that the initial settings for System Common Block within the
Loop Control Unit are correct. In particular, check that data memory (DM)
for node terminals within the CPU Unit used by the Loop Control Unit is
not allocated to other applications in the PLC as well. If the same DM has
been allocated twice, there is a risk that the PLC system will malfunction,
resulting in injury.
• When writing data to the I/O memory in the CPU Unit with function blocks
(e.g., using Send All Blocks, Expanded DO/AO Terminal to CPU Unit, or
DO/AO Terminal to CPU Unit), be sure that the words written to in the I/O
memory are not being used for any other purpose. If I/O memory words
are allocated to more than one purpose, the PLC system may act unexpectedly and cause injury.
126
Section 4-17
System Monitor Screens
!WARNING Check the following items before starting to run the Loop Control Board:
• Do not allow the bank of the EM Area with the number specified for allocation to the HMI (human-machine interface) data to overlap with any other
area used by the CPU Unit or other Units. The block allocated for the HMI
is specified in ITEM 050 (EM Area Bank Allocated for HMI Memory = 0 to
12) of the System Common block. If areas overlap, the system may operate in an unexpected fashion, which may result in injury.
• Do not allow the area to which user link table data is written to overlap
with any other area used by the CPU Unit or other Units. If areas overlap,
the system may operate in an unexpected fashion, which may result in
injury.
• Analog Input/Output Units used in combination with the Loop Control
Board must be mounted correctly, and the unit number set on the front
panel of the Analog Input/Output Unit must match the unit number set on
the Field Terminal block. If the unit numbers do not match, input/output
(read/write) is performed on the data of another Special I/O Unit (whose
unit number is set on the Field Terminal block).
• The defaults of the System Common block on the Loop Control Board
must be set correctly.
!WARNING Always stop the operation of the Loop Control Board before converting any of
the EM Area to file memory. If any part of the EM Area that is being used by
the Loop Control Board for the HMI is converted to file memory during Board
operation, the system may operate in an unexpected fashion, which may
result in injury.
Note
First sufficiently check system operation using the CX-Process Tool (check
the load rate, etc.: Execution, Operation, Monitor Run Status), and sufficiently
check operation (Monitor Run Status, Start) for the Function Block data that
has been created, and then change to actual operation. In particular, first
check that the load rate is 60% or less, and then change to actual operation.
1,2,3...
1. Click the number button for the Loop Control Unit you want to use, as
shown.
Click here.
The Run/Stop Command Dialog Box will be displayed as shown (for a Loop
Control Unit).
• Loop Control Unit is stopped.
127
Section 4-17
System Monitor Screens
• Loop Control Unit is running.
2. Select Stop, HOT START, or COLD START, and then click the Execute
Button.
Click the Refresh Button to check and redisplay the run status of the Loop
Control Unit.
4-17-3 Backing Up Data during Operation
With the LCB01/05 (Version 1.50 and later), LCB05D, or LCB03, data can be
backed up during operation from the Run Command Dialog Box.
Function block data in the RAM in the Loop Control Board is backed up to the
flash memory in the Loop Control Board without interrupting operation.
An entry will be added to the system monitor log to indicate a backup operation was performed during operation.
Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Click the button (here B) for the Loop Control Board for which data is to be
backed up.
Click
2. Display the Run/Stop Command Dialog Box.
128
System Monitor Screens
Section 4-17
3. Click the Send Button for the backup during operation command. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed to confirm the backup during operation.
Click the OK Button.
4. A dialog box will appear when the command has been completed. Click the
OK Button.
Precautions for Backing
Up Data during Operation
The command to back up data during operation cannot be used if the Loop
Control Board is not running. The following dialog box will be displayed if an
attempt is made to do so.
The command to back up data during operation cannot be used for Loop Control Boards with a version lower than 1.50. The following dialog box will be displayed if an attempt is made to do so.
The command to back up data during operation cannot be used for Loop Control Units and the command button will thus not be displayed in the Run/Stop
Command Dialog Box.
Note
Observe the following precautions when backing up data during operation.
• The cycle time of the CPU Unit may be extended by approximately 10 ms.
• Up to approximately 10 minutes could be required to complete the
backup.
• If the command to stop operation is selected while backing up data during
operation, operation will stop but the data backup process will continue.
• If the command to back up data during operation is selected while backing up data during operation, the second command will be ignored. Wait
for the backup to be completed before selecting the command again.
129
Section 4-17
System Monitor Screens
4-17-4 Function Block Error Dialog Box Operations
1,2,3...
1. Click the E Button.
Click here.
The Function Block Error Dialog Box will be displayed.
Note
A Block database error indicates an error has occurred in the function block database.
The Function Block Error Dialog Box is displayed in green during normal
operation, and red if there is an error.
2. Click the Execution Error or the Block Database Error button (Battery
Error is displayed only and cannot be selected).
The Details of Function Block Error Dialog Box will be displayed.
Block Database Error
0 = Normal (no errors), –1 = Block number not in use, 90 = Relevant Function
Block has a database error.
Execution Error
0 = Normal (no errors), –1 = Block number not in use, other numbers (1 to 89)
= Error code.
The following table gives the function error codes.
130
Section 4-17
System Monitor Screens
Code
Description
0
Normal
1
Connection terminal/
output terminal connection not defined
2
Default error
3
Variable value error
10
Operation process:
Division by “0”
11
Operation process:
Operation out of
restricted value
12
Argument beyond definition
15
AT error
Explanation
Operation at Error
Either the function block is not
registered to the block
address of the source designation or the destination, or
the ITEM number does not
exist.
When run/stop command S1
turned ON in the ramp program or segment program,
the reference input was outside the rise ramp range.
A constant between A1 and
A8 or an intermediate buffer
between B1 and B4 that is
used in the conditional statement for Arithmetic Operation (Block Model 126) is not
defined.
An attempt was made to execute division by a “0” denominator in the operation
process.
Running of the function
block in question is
stopped, and the functions
in question do not operate
normally.
An attempt was made to execute division by a ”0” denominator in Arithmetic Operation
block (Block Model 126).
The output value of the operation result exceeded the
data length of two bytes.
Execution of the Arithmetic
Operation block will be
stopped.
Remedy
Check the block address
and ITEM number of the
source designation or destination designation.
The program is not started. Check the connection of the
reference input and program settings.
Execution of the Arithmetic
Operation block will be
stopped.
Set definitions for all constants A1 to A8 and an
intermediate buffers B1 to
B4 that are used.
In the case of Multiplication,
DI/AI Terminal from CPU
Unit, DI/AI Terminal from
Expanded CPU Unit or
Field Terminal blocks, the
maximum value is output. In
the case of the Segment
Linearizer or Temperature
and Pressure Correction
blocks, the previous data is
retained.
In the case of DI/AI Terminal from CPU Unit, DI/AI
Terminal from Expanded
CPU Unit or Field Terminal
blocks, check the scaling
value, and in the case of the
Segment Linearizer block,
check the setting value of
the input coordinate side. In
the case of temperature
and pressure correction,
check the gain bias value.
Check the contents of the
conditional statement and
calculation expressions for
division by 0.
If there is a problem, review
the settings of related
ITEMs.
Output becomes the maximum value or minimum
value of the output range.
Note An error does not occur (For example, when the outeven if the output range put range is 320.00, the
output becomes +320.00 or
(e.g., 320.00) is
320.00.)
exceeded if the data
length of two bytes is
not exceeded.
The arguments or results for Execution of the Arithmetic Check the contents of the
conditional statement and
a Arithmetic Operation block Operation block will be
calculation expressions and
stopped.
exceed the defined limits.
correct the mistake.
Execution of the Arithmetic Check the range of the
An argument used in Aritharguments and correct the
metic Operation (Block Model Operation block will be
conditional statement or
126) is beyond the definition. stopped.
calculation expressions.
Check the following AT
A limit cycle cannot be gener- Execution of the relevant
block will be stopped.
parameters: ITEM 036 to
ated for Basic PID (Block
ITEM 040. Also, set ITEM
Model 011) or Advanced PID
051 to 2 s or less.
(Block Model 012) or suitable
PID constants cannot be calculated.
131
Section 4-17
System Monitor Screens
Code
19
Description
Explanation
Operation at Error
Remedy
Inappropriate operation Two or more S1 to S3 select
switches are set to 1 (ON) at
the same time in the 3-output
Selector block (Block Model
163) or 3-input Selector block
(Block Model 164).
Download terminal
Data exchange with the CPU
data exchange error
Unit is not being executed
correctly on the CPU Unit Terminal, Expanded CPU Unit
Terminal, Node Terminals
and Field Terminal blocks.
I/O memory address
An address out of the I/O
out-of-range
memory address range has
been specified on the CPU
Unit Terminal, Expanded
CPU Unit Terminal, Node Terminals and Field Terminal
blocks.
The output value that was
active before the error
occurred is held.
Re-program the Step Ladder Program block so that
S1 to S3 select switches
are set to 1 (ON) independent of each other.
The data of the function
block in question is not
updated.
29
Reception error for
external device
Communications will be
stopped with the specified
ES100X and tried with
another ES100X.
30
Response timeout
A communications frame
error was generated by the
data received from an
ES100X Controller for an
ES100X Controller Terminal
(Block Model 045). (An FCS
check error or frame error
occurred 3 times in a row.
A response was not returned
after sending data to the Controller for a ES100X Controller Terminal (Block Model
045). (Response was not
returned for 5 s 3 times.)
If a malfunction has
occurred on the CPU Unit,
follow the remedy for that
error. If the CPU Unit is normal, turn ON the power
supply again.
On the CPU Unit Terminal
and Expanded CPU Unit
Terminal blocks, check the
leading address, and on
field terminals check the
setting of the CIO (channel
I/O) Area number setting.
In the case of Node Terminals, check the setting of
the “leading address of the
memory for the node terminals” specified by System
Common block ITEM043.
Check the communications
path and the communications settings (7 data bits,
even parity, and 2 stop bits).
31
Controller unit number
duplicated
Communications will be
stopped with the ES100X
Controllers
70
Illegal combination of
function blocks
The unit number set in ITEM
006 for a ES100X Controller
Terminal (Block Model 045) is
the same as another ES100X
Controller Terminal. (A
response timeout will occur if
the unit number does not
exist.)
The function block on the primary loop side is not basic
PID or advanced PID when
bumpless processing
between primary/secondary
loops was specified in basic
PID or advanced PID.
Check the communications
path, the communications
settings (7 data bits, even
parity, and 2 stop bits), and
other required settings in
the ES100X (parameter
setting mode, unit number,
etc.).
Change the unit number
settings (ITEM 006)so that
each is used only once.
Running of the function
block in question is
stopped.
Check the function block
model number on the primary loop side.
20
21
132
Operation of the function
block in question is
stopped.
Communications will be
stopped with the specified
ES100X and tried with
another ES100X.
Section 4-17
System Monitor Screens
Code
Description
Explanation
Operation at Error
71
Inappropriate parameter
a) The function block in
question is not executed.
b) Data cannot be written.
Check the settings of the
ITEMs.
80
Step Ladder Program
command error
The command in question
and onwards are not executed.
Check the program within
the Step Ladder Program
block.
81
Step Ladder Program
source designation not
defined
a) When restricted conditions are applied across
two ITEMs:
(example: when the unit
pulse output is equal to or
greater than the operation cycle when there is
unit pulse output in run
time accumulation)
b) An attempt has been
made to write out-ofrange data at the ITEM
Setting block.
There is an irrelevant command in the Step Ladder Program, or the method of use of
commands is wrong, for
example, there is an AND
command even though there
is no input command.
Either the function block is not
registered to the block
address currently specified by
each command in the Step
Ladder Program, or the ITEM
number does not exist.
Remedy
The command in question
and onwards are not executed.
Check the block address
and ITEM number.
89
Overuse of Step Ladder Program differentiated instruction
The number of differentiated
instructions to be simultaneously executed has
exceeded 256.
Differentiated instructions
exceeding 256 instructions
are not executed.
Reduce the number of differentiated instructions to
be executed simultaneously.
133
Section 4-18
System Monitor Log Screens
4-18 System Monitor Log Screens
System Monitor Log Screens record and display run/stop logs and the execution error logs as soon as they occur. To display the System Monitor Log
Screen, click the System Monitor Log Button.
Display is red for an occurrence, and black following recovery.
CSV File Output
System monitor log data (date, time, contents of runs/stops and execution
errors) can be output in CSV (Comma Separated Value) file format using the
following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Press the CSV Button to display the Export to CSV File Dialog Box.
2. Specify a name for the CSV file, and click the OK Button. A CSV file will be
created. (By clicking the Browse Button, the CSV file can be created in a
desired folder. The default filename is Sysmlog.csv.) The contents of CSV
files created are as follows:
System Monitor Log (carriage return)
<Export_date>(comma)<Export_time>(carriage_return)<Date>(comma)
<Time>(comma)
<Operation_start/stop_or_contents_of_execution_error>(carriage return)
134
SECTION 5
Configuration Screens
This section describes operating procedures to create screens and monitor using the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
5-1
5-2
Basic Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
Basic Configuration Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
5-2-1
Starting and Stopping the CX-Process Monitor Plus . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
5-2-2
Setting Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
5-2-3
Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
5-3
System Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
5-4
Creating Graphic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
5-4-1
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
5-4-2
Procedure for Creating Graphic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
5-4-3
Graphic Builder Menus and Tool Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
5-4-4
Basic Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
5-4-5
Graphic Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
5-4-6
Setting Graphic Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
5-4-7
5-5
5-6
5-7
Grouping Graphic Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
5-5-1
CRT Builder Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
5-5-2
Overview of Screen Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
5-5-3
Registering Operation Guide Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
5-5-4
Registering Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
5-5-5
Saving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
5-5-6
Deleting Registered Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
5-5-7
Starting the Monitor Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
System Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203
5-6-1
Label Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
5-6-2
Alarm Sound Information Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
5-6-3
Ten-key Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
206
5-6-4
Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
5-6-5
Key-lock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
5-6-6
Multi-screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
5-6-7
Auto-start Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
5-6-8
Auto-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212
5-6-9
CSV File Auto-save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
5-6-10 Setting for Stopping Alarm Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
5-6-11 Settings Required to Start External Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
Checking Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
5-7-1
Starting the Monitor Process and Displaying the Overview Window
223
5-7-2
Setting the Auto-start Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
224
5-7-3
Ending the Monitor Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
225
135
Section 5-1
Basic Configuration Procedure
5-1
Basic Configuration Procedure
Select Omron, CX-Process Monitor Plus, CX-Process Monitor Plus from Windows Start Menu.
In the Main Window, click the Setup Button.
Enter the password.
In the Setup Dialog Box, click the System Monitor Builder Button, and set the communications conditions,
etc., in the System Monitor Setting Window. (Only if using serial communications, when starting the monitor
process, the FinsGateway Serial Unit may start depending on the communications conditions that have been
set.)
In the Setup Dialog Box, click the Graphic Builder Button, and then in the Graphic
Builder, create the Graphic Screen (including tag name selection, etc.,), and save.
In the Setup Dialog Box, click the CRT Builder Button, and set the Builder window
1. Select Settings, Register Screen.
2. Select new screen type.
3. Click New.
4. Double-click Tag No., and select the tag name.
5. Double-click Detailed Settings, and make the
detailed settings.
1. Select Settings, Register Screen.
2. Select new screen type.
3. Click New.
4. Select the Graphic Screen that has been saved.
In CRT Builder, select the Settings Menu, and then select Save, and then click the OK Button.
Set the main system settings under System Information. (Refer to 5-6 System Information Settings.)
Check the screen configuration that has been set. (Refer to 5-7 Checking Configurations.)
136
Section 5-2
Basic Configuration Operations
5-2
5-2-1
Basic Configuration Operations
Starting and Stopping the CX-Process Monitor Plus
Starting
1,2,3...
1. Select Programs, Omron, CX-Process Monitor Plus, and CX-Process
Monitor Plus from the Windows Start Menu.
The CX-Process Monitor Plus Main Window will be displayed.
2. Click the Setup Button.
3. If the tag or network information has been changed, the following dialog
box will be displayed. Click the Yes Button to create a monitor tag file from
the CX-Process Monitor Plus tag file.
!WARNING If the CX-Process Monitor Plus tag settings or network configuration have
been changed, set the CX-Process Monitor Plus screen configuration correctly according to the new settings.
Failure to correctly update the settings may result in unexpected operation by
the machinery.
137
Section 5-2
Basic Configuration Operations
4. A dialog box will be displayed to input the password.
Note
If no password has been set for the initial startup, the dialog box for registering
a password will be displayed when the Setup Button is clicked. It is not possible to configure screens or make settings unless a password has been registered and the correct password has been entered. Personnel who will be
making settings must register a password.
For details on registering passwords, refer to 5-2-2 Setting Passwords.
5. Enter the password and click the OK Button. The Setup Dialog Box will be
displayed.
Stopping
In the Main Window, click the Exit Button.
The Main Window will close, and CX-Process Monitor Plus will stop running.
5-2-2
Setting Passwords
Set the password to configure the CX-Process Monitor Plus Screen and to
protect the settings you have made.
Note
Unless a password has been set and the correct password has been entered,
it will not be possible to make any settings.
1,2,3...
1. If no password has been set and if new tag information is imported, the following dialog box will be displayed when the Setup Button is clicked in the
Main Window.
2. Click the OK Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
138
Section 5-2
Basic Configuration Operations
3. Enter the password, and click the OK Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
4. Enter the password once again, and click the OK Button.
Note
Use the Password Clear utility to change or delete passwords that have been
set. After deleting a password by using the Password Clear utility, use the procedure given above to set a new password. The procedure for using the Password Clear utility is given below.
■
1,2,3...
Changing the Password
1. Start the Password Clear utility. The following dialog box will be displayed.
The Password Clear utility is stored in the following location:
CD-ROM drive: \MonitorPlusPasswordClear\ PasswordClear.exe
2. Enter the password that is set, and then click the OK Button. If the passwords match, the following dialog box will be displayed.
3. Click the Execute Button. The password will be initialized, and the following dialog box will be displayed.
■
If a Password That Has Been Set Is Lost
The following procedure can be used to initialize the password and the Monitor Plus setting data folder where the database path is set.
139
Section 5-2
Basic Configuration Operations
Note
Be careful when initializing the setting data folder. When the setting data
folder is initialized, the screen configurations and other settings will also be
initialized.
1,2,3...
1. Start the Password Clear utility. The following dialog box will be displayed.
The Password Clear utility is stored in the following location:
CD-ROM drive: \MonitorPlusPasswordClear\ PasswordClear.exe
2. If the passwords do not match or if the OK Button is clicked with no password entered, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the Execute
Button.
3. The following dialog box will be displayed. Click the OK Button.
4. The password and the Monitor Plus setting data folder where the database
path is set will be initialized, and the following dialog box will be displayed.
5-2-3
Setup Dialog Box
This section explains the functions of the Setup Dialog Box.
1,2,3...
1. In the Main Window, click the Setup Button.
A dialog box will be displayed to input the password. If no password has
been set, the Setup Dialog Box will not be displayed. For details on setting
a password, refer to 5-2-2 Setting Passwords.
2. Enter the password, and click the OK Button.
140
Section 5-3
System Monitor Settings
The Setup Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Click any button, and then select a function.
Setup Dialog Box
Sets auto-start, tuning trend scale
display, multi-screen, label
information, alarm sound
information, and ten-key. Refer to
5-6 System Information Settings
for details.
1. Sets the System
Monitor Screen. Refer
to 5-3 System Monitor
Settings for details.
2. Opens the Graphic Screen Create
Window.
Refer to 5-4 Creating Graphic Screens.
3. Configures the screen.
Refer to 5-5 Screen
Configuration for details.
Refer to the following sections for details on the functions of each button.
5-3
System Monitor Settings
Using the System Monitor Setting Window, register the PLC and Loop Control
Unit/Board to be monitored using the System Monitor Screen. Also register
the local computer to perform the monitoring.
The setting items are as follows:
PLC setting
PLC node number (address)
Use the System
Monitor
Screen for
Unit address of the Loop Control Unit/
Board (The unit address of the Loop Con- this setting.
trol Board is always 225.)
Computer setting Computer node number (default is 32)
Communications type (CLK, Serial, Ethernet) (Use the System
Monitor Screen to set CLK or Ethernet communications.)
For serial connections, you must also set the COM port and baud
rate.
When the monitor process is started with serial (Host Link) communications
by clicking the Run Button in the Main Window or the Setup Dialog Box, FinsGateway communications will start according to the settings of the following
communications conditions.
• Communications type: Serial (Host Link)
• COM port used and baud rate
Note
The PLC settings (node address, Unit address, etc.) set here can
be used only from the System Monitor Screen. Actual communications processing depends on the network address, node address,
and Unit address set using the CX-Process Tool. Controller Link
and Ethernet settings within the computer settings made here can
also be used only from the System Monitor Screen. Perform actual
communications processing by manually starting FinsGateway.
141
Section 5-3
System Monitor Settings
Note
1,2,3...
Set the PLC settings (node address, Unit address, etc.) made here to agree
with the network address, node address, and Unit address settings made
using CX-Process Tool. If the settings do not agree, monitoring using the System Monitor Screen will not be performed correctly.
1. In the Setup Dialog Box, click the System Monitor Builder Button.
Click here
The System Monitor Setting Window will be displayed.
Specify the node address of the computer connected to the PLC (the
default is 32). Normally, be sure to allocate 32 to the computer connected to the PLC. Also, set the node address of the FinsGateway
computer to 32.
2. Select the node number allocated to the PLC or computer, as described
below, and then click the button displayed under the node number.
• PLC: Select the number from the list box.
• Computer: Input the number in the list box. Normally register node 32.
(The node number of the computer connected to the PLC is the same as
the number input for the computer node in the bottom right of the System
Monitor Settings Window.)
142
Section 5-3
System Monitor Settings
3. Select the device (PLC or computer), and then make the appropriate settings.
Select PLC to enable the Settings Button.
4. When PC has been selected as the node type, click the Settings Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed. Make the setting as shown.
Note
When using more than one Loop Control Unit in the same PLC, set the unit
addresses and function numbers in ascending order.
You can connect one Loop Control Board and up to three Loop Control Units
to one PLC. Select the check box for the Loop Control Unit/Board mounted to
the PLC, and enter the unit address.
The unit address of the Loop Control Board is always 225.
Click the OK Button to return to the Set Node Dialog Box.
Note
The unit address for each node set here can be used only from the System
Monitor Screen. Which Loop Control Unit/Board’s data and which PLC CXProcess Monitor Plus will be accessed depends on the network address,
node address, and unit address set using the CX-Process Tool. (This is linked
to the tag information.) The unit address of the Loop Control Board is always
225.
5. Click the Communication type setting Button. The following dialog box
will appear.
143
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
The Details button will be enabled if you
select Serial. If you click the Details Button,
the following dialog box will be displayed.
In Network Type, select CLK, Serial, or Ethernet.
If you select Serial, set the computer COM port, and the baud rate. If necessary, also set Initialize serial port. Refer to the following Note.
Click the OK Button to return to the Set Node Dialog Box.
Note
If the communications type is set to Serial (Host Link), then when the monitor
process is started (by clicking the Run Button in the Main Window or in the
Setup Dialog Box), FinsGateway Serial Unit driver will start according to the
communications conditions set here.
If you select another communications type (Controller Link or Ethernet), the
communications type set here can be used only from the System Monitor
Screen. You must start the FinsGateway manually.
6. When you have finished making all the PLC and computer settings, click
the OK Button in the System Monitor Settings Window. This completes the
System Monitor settings.
5-4
5-4-1
Creating Graphic Screens
Outline
The Graphic Screen displays schematically the device status.
Create the Graphic Screen using the Graphic Builder.
• Paste to the screen graphic elements representing plant instrumentation,
which have been provided, and use them to display the device status, to a
maximum of 200 screens.
• Library figures and images:
Text, lines, rectangles, round rectangles (rectangles with rounded corners), ellipses, polygons, and images
• Fixed graphic display elements:
Text boxes, instruments, thermometers, transmitters, and orifices
• Changeable graphic display elements:
Analog inputs: Bar graph displays, numerical value displays, and tanks
Analog settings: Numerical settings (See note.)
Contact inputs (display): Pumps, valves, and pipes
Contact settings (operation): Switches (See note.)
Note
144
If making analog values or contact settings, use tags for Constant
Generator (Block Model 166) and Internal Switch (Block Model
209).
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
• Screen display objects:
Screen jump objects, FP switch (faceplate pop-up) objects
Element
Function block or ITEM set as send source
Function block Control Blocks: Basic PID (Block Model 011), Advanced PID (Block Model 012), Blended PID (Block
Model 013), Batch Flowrate Capture (Block Model 014), Indication and Setting (Block Model 031), Indication and Operation (Block Model 032), Ratio Setting (Block Model 033), Indicator (Block Model 034), 2position ON/OFF (Block Model 001), and 3-position ON/OFF (Block Model 002)
Operation Blocks: High/Low Alarm (Block Model 111), Segment Program 2 (Block Model 157), ON/OFF
Valve Manipulator (Block Model 221), Motor Manipulator (Block Model 222), Reversible Motor Manipulator (Block Model 223), Motor Opening Manipulator (Block Model 224), Timer (Block Model 205), and
Counter (Block Model 208)
The following for all function blocks:
Analog input signals (using Input Selector (Block Model 162))
Analog output signals (using Constant Generator (Block Model 166))
Or Analog value parameters(using Constant Generator (Block Model 166))
Contact input signals or contact output signals for all function blocks, or contact value parameters (Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) + Internal Switch (Block Model 209))
Display
Analog values: Bar graphs, numerical values, tank level
Contacts: Indicators, pumps, valves, and pipes
Setting
Analog values: Numerical values (using Constant Generator (Block Model 166))
Contacts: Switches (using Contact Distributor (Block Model 201) + Internal Switch (Block Model 209))
5-4-2
Procedure for Creating Graphic Screens
Starting the Graphic
Builder
1,2,3...
1. In the Setup Dialog Box, click the Graphic Builder Button.
Click here
The Graphic Builder will be displayed.
145
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Creating Graphic Screens
1,2,3...
Graphic objects are placed on Graphic Screens. The object placed on a
Graphic Screen in this example is a data box.
1. Select Insert Functional Object - Data (or click the
icon on the Object Toolbar).
The data box will be displayed on the top left of the screen as shown below.
2. Double-click the data box to select it, and drag it to the display position.
3. Drag any of the eight points on the data box frame to enlarge or reduce its
size.
4. Right-click the data box and select Properties - GrfData2 Control Object
from the pop-up menu.
5. The GrfData2 Control Properties Dialog Box will be displayed. Make the
settings for the data box and click the OK Button.
For details on setting graphic objects, refer to 5-4-6 Setting Graphic Objects.
6. Place other graphic objects using the same procedure as above.
Saving Graphic Screens
1,2,3...
Graphic Screens that have been created are saved one by one.
1. Select Save or Save As from the File Menu, or click the
icon.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed. Input the file name and click the
Save Button.
One Graphic Screen will be saved (with a GRF file name extension).
146
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Exiting the Graphic
Screen Creation Window
Note
In the File menu, click Exit.
The Graphic Builder will close.
1. When using the Graphic Screen, first create and save the graphics using
Graphic Builder (using the CRT Builder Button in the Setup Dialog Box),
and then register the saved graphics in the Overview Screen in the format
you have selected. Consequently, before registering the graphics in the
Overview screen, you must create and save the graphics using the Graphic
Builder.
2. If you have not saved the edited data when you click Exit, a window recommending that you save the data will be displayed. Save all necessary
data. After performing this operation, the Graphic Builder will close.
3. You must configure the screen to display the Graphics Screen you have
created using CX-Process Monitor Plus. Refer to 5-5 Screen Configuration
for how to make the settings.
Graphic Screens Created Using CX-Process Monitor Plus Version 1 or
Earlier
Graphic Screens created using CX-Process Monitor Plus version 1 or earlier
can be used with version 2 by following this procedure:
1. In the Graphic Screen Creation Window, select File - Open.
2. The Open Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the Graphic Screen that was
created using CX-Process Monitor Plus version 1, and click the Open Button.
Select the path of the folder
containing the Graphic Screen
data.
Select the Graphic Screen
data.
Select "All Files."
3. Using the procedure described in Saving Graphic Screens above, save the
monitor Graphic Screen read to the Graphic Screen Creation Window.
147
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Graphic objects created using CX-Process Monitor Plus version 1 cannot be
used with the expanded functions of version 2.
To use all of the functions for graphic objects, create new graphic objects
using CX-Process Monitor Plus version 2.
5-4-3
Graphic Builder Menus and Tool Bars
Menu Command
Menu
File
Edit
View
148
This shows the commands available in the Graphics Builder.
Command
New
Open
Save
Save As
Save Group File
Load Group File
Delete File Information
Shortcut
key
Ctrl + N
Ctrl + O
Ctrl + S
---------
Modify File Information
---
Recent Files (1…2…)
Exit
Undo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Select All
Paste Special...
Group Objects
Ungroup Objects
Properties
Create/Paste Objects
----Ctrl + Z
Ctrl + X
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + V
Del
Ctrl + A
--Ctrl + G
Ctrl + F
Alt + Enter
---
Links
Object
-----
Standard Toolbar
Object Toolbar
Paper Color
Basic Color
System Color
Display Frame
Grid line
-------------
Refresh
---
Function
Create new Graphic Screen.
Close created Graphic Screen.
Overwrite project being edited.
Save project being edited with a new name.
Save grouped graphic object data.
Read grouped graphic object data.
Specify name of a registered Graphic Screen, and delete
that file information.
Specify name of a registered Graphic Screen, and change
the file information for it.
Display the most recent files.
Close Graphic Builder.
Undo the previous operation.
Cut the specified range.
Copy the specified range.
Paste the contents of the clipboard.
Delete the specified range.
Select all items.
This menu item is not used.
Group two or more selected figures objects.
Clear grouping of objects.
Display properties of selected figures or image objects.
Display the Insert Objects dialog box.
Select and create objects from the menu of objects supported by CX-Process Monitor Plus and objects that can
be inserted into the Graphic Screen.
Specify and paste file names.
This menu item is not used.
Open the selected figure, image or functional object properties.
Select whether to display or hide the Standard Toolbar
Select whether to display or hide the Object Toolbar.
Set the background color.
Restore the default background color.
Select whether to display or hide object frame.
Set the grid lines.
10 points, 20 points, 40 points, 60 points, or none
You can also change the line color.
Refresh the screen.
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Menu
Move
Command
To Front
To Back
To Top
To Bottom
Arrange
Make Same
Size
Insert Figure/
Image
Insert Functional Object
Window
Help
Align Left
Align Right
Align Top
Align Bottom
Align Recent
Left
Align Recent
Right
Align Recent
Top
Align Recent
Bottom
Distribute
Horizontally
Distribute Vertically
Width
Height
Both
Shortcut
key
+
–
Ctrl + +
Ctrl + −
-----------
Function
Move the selected object to the front.
Move the selected object to the back.
Move the selected object to the top.
Move the selected object to the bottom.
Align multiple selected objects on the left, right, top, or bottom of the selected object that is farthest to the left, right,
top, or bottom.
Align multiple objects on the left, right, top, or bottom of the
last object that was selected.
-----------
Distribute multiple selected objects with even spacing horizontally.
Distribute multiple selected objects with even spacing vertically.
Unify the width, height, or both, of multiple selected
objects.
Snap to Grid
---------
Text
Line
Rectangle
Round rect
Ellipse
Polygon
Image
Tank
Pipe
Pump
Valve
Meter bar
Parts
---------------------------
Switch
Data
Text Box
Jump
FP Switch
Cascade
Tile Vertically
---------------
Insert a text display object.
Insert a line.
Insert a rectangle.
Insert a rectangle with rounded corners.
Insert an ellipse.
Insert a polygon.
Insert an image object.
Insert a tank.
Insert a pipe.
Insert a pump.
Insert a valve.
Insert a meter bar.
Insert parts (instrument, thermometer, transmitter, or orifice).
Insert a switch.
Insert a data box.
Insert a text box.
Insert an object to call another screen.
Insert a FP Switch object to display a faceplate.
Cascade Graphic Screen Edit Windows.
Tile Graphic Screen Edit Windows vertically.
Tile Horizontally
Align Icons
Select Window (1…2…)
Version
---------
Tile Graphic Screen Edit Windows horizontally.
Align minimized Edit Windows.
Select an edited Graphic Screen and display it in front.
Display the Graphics Builder version information.
Align a selected object to the nearest grid cross point
149
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Toolbars
To display or hide the toolbar, first select View and then either Standard Toolbar or Object Toolbar.
The Builder Window has two types of toolbars, as shown below.
Standard Toolbar
Icon
New
Function
Function
Align multiple objects on left
Open
Align multiple objects on right
Save
Align multiple objects at top
Cut
Align multiple objects at bottom
Copy
Evenly space multiple objects
horizontally
Paste
Evenly space multiple objects
vertically
To Top
Group objects
To Bottom
Ungroup objects
To Front
To Back
150
Icon
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Object Toolbar
Icon
Function
Select a figure, image, or
functional object
Insert a text display
Icon
Icon
Function
Insert a numerical data box
Insert a line
Insert parts (instrument, thermometer, transmitter, or orifice)
Insert a switch
Insert a rectangle
Insert a text box
Insert an image
Insert a Screen jump object
Insert a rectangle with
rounded corners
Insert an FP switch to display
a faceplate pop-up
Insert an ellipse
Display the Version Dialog
Box
Insert a polygon
Refresh the screen
Function
Insert a tank
Insert a pipe
Insert a pump
Insert an ellipse
Insert a meter bar
5-4-4
Basic Operations
The following table displays the basic Graphic Builder operations (operations
other than those displayed on the menu and toolbars).
Objective
Select object
Select multiple objects
Cancel selection
Move object
Operation
Double-click
Drag to surround the multiple objects
Click an area outside of the selected object
Select the object, and then drag it
Select the object and then press the Left, Right, Up, or
Down Arrow Key on the keyboard.
Enlarge/reduce object Select the object, and then drag one of the 8 points displaying the outline of the object
Set object properties
Right-click the object, select Properties or Grf*** Control
(shape, color, font, etc.) Object, and then click the tab for the item you want to set.
151
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
5-4-5
Graphic Objects
Functional Objects
Elements
Object name
Change- Tank
able
objects
152
Shape
(typical)
Function
Displays analog
value.
Specifications
Other
Flashing
tag allocation
Show/
hide tag
allocation
Yes
Yes
Pipe
Displays contact.
Yes
Yes
Pump
Displays contact.
Yes
Yes
Valve
Displays contact.
Yes
Yes
Meter bar
Displays analog
value.
Yes
Yes
Numerical Data
Box
Displays analog
value (displays
numerical value),
and analog value
setting (numerical
value setting).
Yes
Yes
Switch
Displays contact
(indicator), and
contact setting
(switch).
Yes
Yes
Screen jump
Change display to
specified screen
No
No
Faceplate switch
Faceplate pop-up
display
No
No
Number of divisions (display
required), font, upper limit,
lower limit, type (tanks 1 to 3),
tag data, color (foreground and
background colors)
Display frame (top line, bottom
line, right line, left line), colors
(ON /OFF colors), tag data
Direction (up, down, right, left),
color (ON/OFF colors), tag
data
Type (horizontal, vertical and
up square/right square/left
square/up semicircle/right
semicircle/left semicircle), tag
data, colors (ON/OFF colors)
Number of divisions (display
enable/disable), upper limit,
lower limit, direction (vertical,
horizontal), font, tag data, color
(foreground and background
colors)
Type (3D display, display frame
0 to 4, flat display), font, tag
data, display data, input data,
color (character and background colors), text layout (horizontal or vertical), data display
input setting (display, input),
range check for data input
Character specification (ON/
OFF), font, type (DI/DO), tag
data, operation confirmation (Y/
N), color (ON/OFF colors, character color)
Display type (buttons, rectangles), text specification, screen
selection type (every time,
screen selection, or according
to specification), color (button
color, frame color, interior color,
text color)
Display type (buttons/rectangles), text specification, tag
specification, color (button
color, frame color, interior color,
text color)
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Elements
Fixed
objects
Object name
Shape
(typical)
Text box
Function
Show/
hide tag
allocation
---
Specifications
Flashing
Other
tag allocation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Orifice
Yes
Yes
Instrument
Yes
Yes
Temperature meter
Yes
Yes
Parts Transmitter
Text, type (3D display, display
frame 0 to 4, flat), font, color
(character and background colors
Direction (up, down, right, left),
color (border line color and
background colors)
Figures and Images
Elements
Figures
Object name
Text
Line
Rectangle
Rectangle with
rounded corners
(Round rect)
Ellipse
Polygon
Images
Image
Shape
(typical)
Function
Specifications
Show/ Flashing
Other
hide tag tag alloallocacation
tion
--Yes
Yes
Text string, font, color settings
(direct, tag settings), display
position, border lines (line
width, line style, color settings),
background color (color settings)
--Yes
Yes
Color settings (direct, tag settings), border lines (line width,
line style, color settings)
--Yes
Yes
Color settings (direct, tag settings), border lines (line width,
line style, color settings), background color (color settings)
--Yes
Yes
Color settings (direct, tag settings), border lines (line width,
line style, corner color settings), background color
(enable/disable, color settings)
--Yes
Yes
Color settings (direct, tag settings), border lines (line width,
line style, color settings), background color (enable/disable,
color settings)
--Yes
Yes
Color settings (direct, tag settings), border lines (line width,
line style, color settings), background color (enable/disable,
color settings)
Display image files Yes
Yes
Color settings (direct, tag setin BMP or JPG fortings), border lines (line width,
mat
line style, color settings), image
specification (direct, tag settings)
153
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
5-4-6
Setting Graphic Objects
This section describes how to set properties (shapes, colors, and tags) for
graphics objects.
Graphic object properties are set by displaying the dialog box described
below.
Functional Objects
Double-click a functional object to select it, and then right-click and select
Grf***** Control Object.
Figures and Images
Double-click a figure or image object to select it, and then right-click and
select Properties.
Setting Functional Objects
Tank (
)
The tank is filled at the ratio of the upper and lower limits according to the
specified tag value.
Setting Method
General Tag
Select this option to display the tag name on the screen.
Set the number of divisions
(from 1 to 50) to be displayed
on the tank.
Select the tag name
for the function block.
Set the upper and lower limits
for the range of tag values to
be displayed for the tank.
Set the font for the gradations
and tag name.
Select the function block ITEM
for the above tag.
Select the shape for the tank.
Tank1
154
Tank2
Tank3
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Color Settings Tab
Click to set the fill color according
to the tag value.
Click to set the background color
for the tank.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
Pipe (
)
The color is changed according to the ON/OFF status of the specified tag.
Setting Method
General Tab
Select the tag
name for the
function block.
Select the options for the
frame to be displayed
around the pipe.
Select the function block
ITEM for the above tag.
Set the pipe colors for when the
specified contact ITEM is ON and OFF.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
155
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Pump (
)
The color is changed according to the ON/OFF status of the specified tag.
Setting Method
General Tab
Select the tag name
for the function
block.
Select the direction for
the pump.
Select the function block
ITEM for the above tag.
Set the pump colors for when the
specified contact ITEM is ON and OFF.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
Valve (
)
The color is changed according to the ON/OFF status of the specified tag.
Setting Method
General Tab
Select the valve type.
Horizontal
Vertical
Up square
Right square
Left square
Up semicircle
Select the tag name
for the function
block.
Right semicircle
Left semicircle
Set the valve colors for when
the specified contact ITEM is
ON and OFF.
Select the function block
ITEM for the above tag.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
156
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Meter Bar (
)
The meter bar is filled at the upper and lower limit ratio according to the value
of the specified tag.
Setting Method
General Tab
Select the direction for the meter bar.
Select this option to display
gradations on the meter bar.
Select the tag name
for the function
block.
Set the number of divisions
(from 1 to 50) to be displayed
on the meter bar.
Select the function block ITEM
for the above tag.
Set the upper and lower limits for the range of
tag values to be displayed for the meter bar.
Set the font for the
gradations.
Color Settings Tab
Click to set the fill color according to
the tag value.
Click to set the background color for
the meter bar.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
Parts (
)
These are image objects used for screens such as Control Screens.
Setting Method
General Tab
Select the parts type.
Transmitter
Orifice
Instrument
Temperature meter
Select the direction for
the parts.
157
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Color Settings Tag
Click to set the border line color for
the parts.
Click to set the background color
for the parts.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
158
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Switch (
)
The switch operates as shown below, depending on the type of switch.
Clicking this switch turns the Loop Controller tag ON or OFF.
(Type: DO)
Displays the ON/OFF status of the Loop Controller tag.
(Type: DI)
Setting Method
General Tab
Input the text to be
displayed on the
switches when ON
and OFF.
(Up to 18 characters can be input.)
Set the colors for the switch when it
is ON and OFF.
Select the switch type.
D0
DI
Select the tag name
for the function
block.
Set the font to be
displayed on the
switches.
Select whether a dialog box is to be displayed to
confirm the switch operation when the switch is
pressed.
Select the function block
ITEM for the above tag.
Color Settings Tab
Click to set the color of the text to
be displayed on the switch.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
159
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Data (
)
Executes the following operations for specified tag (analog ITEM) values.
• Data view: Reads and displays specified tag values.
• Data input: Writes to specified tags the values input for data.
Setting Method
General Tab
Select the tag name for the
function block.
Select the data
display frame type.
Select the function block ITEM
for the above tag.
Set the font for the
numbers displayed.
Select the position of
numbers to be displayed in
the data frame.
Select the data operation.
View: Read and display specified tags.
Input: Write to specified tags the values input for data.
Note
Upper and lower limits can be set for input
values. (See note.)
Upper and Lower Limits for Inputs
1. Upper and lower limits can be set once the following items have been set.
Select Input for the Data operation.
Select Tag (Analog ITEM) for Tag Data.
2. The upper and lower limits are automatically displayed according to the tag
ITEM type selected for Tag Data.
The upper and lower limits can be changed when inputting numbers directly.
3. Operation when Using Upper and Lower Limits
When changing a number, the upper and lower limits are displayed as
shown below. If a number exceeding the upper or lower limit is input, a
message is displayed and the input is not allowed.
160
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Color Settings Tab
Click to set the color for the numbers
to be displayed in the data.
Select this option to make the data
background transparent.
If No background color is not selected,
click to set the data background color.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
Text Box (
)
Used to display text input by the user.
Multiple lines can be displayed.
Setting Method
General Tab
Input the text to be
displayed.
Select the type of frame to
enclose the text.
Set the font for the
text to be displayed.
Color Settings Tab
Click to set the color for the text to be
displayed in the text box.
If No background color is selected, click
to set the text box background color.
Select this option to make the data
background transparent.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
161
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Screen Jump (
)
Used to change the display to a specified screen.
Setting Method
General Tab
Select the shape for the
jump object.
Input the text to be displayed on jump objects.
Set the color and
font for the text.
Button
Rectangle
If Button is selected for the
shape, select the color for
buttons on the screen.
If Rectangle is selected for
the shape, select whether
rectangle frame lines and
inside fill are to be used,
and if so, select the colors.
If Select screen every time is specified for the screen selection type, click
the jump object to set the destination screen.
Select the jump object operation.
Select screen every time:
Move to a screen selected from a
dialog box.
Move to specified screen:
Move to a screen specified in
advance.
Before this setting is made, the destination screen must be registered in
advance in the Builder Window. For details on registering screens, refer
to 5-5-2 Overview of Screen Registration.
FP Switch (
)
Used to display specified faceplates as pop-ups on Graphic Screens.
Setting Method
General Tab
Select the shape for the
FP switch.
Select the color for the top
of the button.
If Rectangle is selected for
the shape, select whether
rectangle frame lines and
inside fill are to be used,
and, if so, select the
colors.
Input the text to be displayed on the FP switch.
Set the color and
font for the text.
When the FP switch is clicked, select by tag name the faceplate that is to be displayed.
Note: If a tag that is not registered to the Control Screen is selected, nothing will be
displayed even if the FP switch is clicked.
For details on faceplate settings, refer to 5-5-2 Overview of Screen Registration.
162
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Note
1. A maximum of ten faceplates can be simultaneously displayed on Graphic
Screens by using FP switches.
2. All faceplates displayed on a screen will be lost by moving to another
screen while the faceplates are being displayed.
Setting Figures and Images
Setting Figures
(
This section describes how to set lines, rectangles, rectangles with rounded
corners, ellipses, and polygons.
)
Note
The figure background color and border line color can be changed using tag
values.
Example: Changing Figure Background Color from White to Red by
Turning ON Tag001
Background
color
Border line
color
Tag001:
Background color
white when ON
Tag001:
Background color
red when OFF
Drawing Method
Lines, Rectangles, Rectangles with Rounded Corners, and Ellipses
1,2,3...
1. In Object Tool Bar click the icon of the figure to be drawn, or select Insert
Figure/Image and then Line, Rectangle, Round rect or Ellipse.
2. Click the start point and drag to the end point.
Start point
Drag
End point
Note
Adjusting Rectangles with Rounded Corners
The angle of a corner in a rectangle with rounded corners can be adjusted by
clicking on the point displayed in the upper right-hand corner (■).
Drag
163
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Polygon
1,2,3...
1. Either click the polygon icon in the Object Tool Bar or select Insert Figure/
Image - Polygon.
2. Click the end point and then click the next corner.
Start point
Click
3. Double-click the end point.
Double-click
Setting Method
The settings are described here using a figure (rectangle with rounded corners) as an example.
Border Line Tab
Select whether border lines are to be
used for the figure.
Set the line width for
when the line type is
solid line.
Set the type of line
to be used for the
border lines.
Set the rounding
of the corners.
Select how the border line color is to
be displayed.
Direct color settings:
The border line color is fixed.
The color is directly specified in
the Color settings.
Tag settings:
The border line color is changed
according to the tag value.
Select the tag ITEM.
Select the tag name for controlling the border line color.
Set the condition for the border line color to be displayed.
The screen displayed will depend on the tag type (contact ITEM or analog ITEM). (See note.)
164
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Note: Setting Threshold Values
Contact ITEM (Digital Item):
Analog ITEM:
Set the border line colors for when
the tag value is ON and OFF.
Set the threshold values for changing border line
colors.
Set the border
line colors for
the figure.
Set the threshold values.
Set the values in order
from the bottom, with the
smallest value first.
Background Color Tab
Select whether background color is
to be used for the figure.
Set the background color.
Direct color settings:
The background color is fixed.
The color is directly specified in
the Color settings.
Tag settings:
The background color is changed
according to the tag value.
Select the tag name for controlling the background color.
Select the tag ITEM.
Set the condition for the background color to be displayed.
The screen displayed will depend on the tag type (contact ITEM or analog ITEM).
The settings for the threshold values are the same as for the Border Line Tab. Refer to the description for the Border
Line Tab above.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
165
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Text (
)
Used to display text string that have been input.
Setting Method
Enter Text Tab
Click a button to select the
display position of the text
string in the text frame.
Input the text string to be displayed
(up to 256 characters).
Select the method for displaying the
text string.
Direct color settings:
The text color is fixed.
The color is directly specified in
the Color settings.
Tag settings:
The text color is changed
according to the tag value.
Top left
Top center
Top right
Middle left
Middle center
Middle right
Bottom left
Bottom center
Bottom right
Select the tag ITEM.
If Tag settings is selected, select the tag
name for controlling the text color.
Set the condition for displaying the text color.
The screen displayed will depend on the tag type (contact ITEM or
analog ITEM).
The settings for the threshold values are the same as for the
Border Line Tab. Refer to the description for the Border Line Tab
above.
Border Line Tab
Refer to the description above of the setting method for the Borderline Tab.
Background Color Tab
Refer to the description above of the setting method for the Background Color
Tab.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
166
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Images (
)
Image files in BMP (bit map) or JPG format can be displayed as graphic
images.
Setting Method
Border Line Tab
Select whether a border line is to be
placed around the image.
Set the border line
width and type.
Select the method for displaying the
text string.
Direct color settings:
The border line color is fixed.
The color is directly specified in
the Color settings.
Tag settings:
The border line color is changed
according to the tag value.
Select the tag name for controlling the border line color.
Select the tag ITEM.
Set the condition for the border line color to be displayed.
The screen displayed will depend on the tag type (contact ITEM or analog ITEM).
The settings for the threshold values are the same as for the Border Line Tab. Refer to
the description for the Border Line Tab above.
Select BMP or JPG Tab
Select the method for displaying the
text string.
Direct image settings
Displays one image file only.
The image file is directly specified
in the Image selection.
Tag settings:
The image file displayed is
changed according to the tag
value.
Select the tag name for controlling the image file display.
Select the tag ITEM.
Set the condition for multiple image files to be displayed.
The screen displayed will depend on the tag type (contact ITEM or analog ITEM). (See note.)
167
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Note: Setting Threshold Values
Contact ITEM:
Analog ITEM:
Set the image files to be displayed when
the tag value is ON and OFF.
Set the threshold values for changing the image
file displayed.
Set the image to be displayed.
The setting must be made at near the
threshold value.
If nothing is set, the display will be filled
in black.
Set the threshold values.
Set the values in order from the bottom, with the smallest
value first.
For details on the Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab and the Flashing Tag Settings
Tab, refer to Common Settings for Graphic Objects in this section.
Note
When specifying multiple image files to be displayed for an image object, the
following procedure can be used to check the contents of the image files.
1. Double-click the image object to select it.
2. Right-click and select Switch Image and then Image1(1) to Image4(4)
from the menu.
168
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
3. The image file selected from the menu will be displayed for the image object.
The following procedure can also be used to display an image on the Graphic
Screen.
1. Copy the image using another drawing program and then select Edit Paste (Ctrl+V) in the Graphic Screen Creation Window to paste the image.
2. Select Edit - Create/Paste Objects in the Graphic Screen Creation Window, and then specify and insert the image file.
Common Settings for
Graphic Objects
This section describes the settings made in common for graphic objects.
Showing or Hiding Tag
Settings
Graphic object displays are deleted according to tag values.
Example: Displaying Usable Switches Only
Hidden during pump
operation
Switches to start and
stop a pump
Hidden while
pump is stopped
Example: Figure (Rectangle with Rounded Corners)
Show/Hide Tag Settings Tab
Select whether the show/hide tag settings function
is to be used.
Select the tag name for controlling the graphic object display.
Select the tag ITEM.
Set the condition for the graphic object to be displayed.
The screen displayed will depend on the tag type (contact
ITEM or analog ITEM). (See note.)
169
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Note: Setting Threshold Values
Contact ITEM (Digital Item):
Select whether the graphic object is to be displayed when the tag value is ON
or OFF.
Analog ITEM:
Set the threshold values for displaying and hiding the graphic object.
Note
Example 1: Show Threshold Value 6 and Hide Threshold Value 5
Show when the tag value is 6 or higher, and hide when it is 5 or lower.
Example 2: Show Threshold Value 10 and Hide Threshold Value 5
Show when the tag value is 10 or higher, and hide when it is 5 or lower.
The prior status is held as shown below when the tag value is from 9 to 6.
Show
Graphic object
display status
Tag value
Show
Hide
10
8
5
8
10
The prior status (show or hide) is held.
Example 3: Show Threshold Value 5 and Hide Threshold Value 5
Show when the threshold value is 5 or higher, and hide when it is less than 5.
Flashing Tag Settings
A graphic object is made to flash according to the tag value.
Example: A Numeric Object That Flashes When a Particular Temperature
(100°C) Is Reached
The numeric object flashes when
the temperature reaches 100°C.
170
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Example: Figure (Rectangle with Rounded Corners)
Flashing Tag Settings Tab
Select whether the flashing tag settings function is to be used.
Select the tag ITEM.
Select the tag name for controlling the graphic object flashing.
Set the condition for the graphic object to flash.
The screen displayed will depend on the tag type (contact ITEM or analog ITEM). (See note.)
Note: Setting Threshold Values
Contact ITEM (Digital Item):
Select whether the graphic object display is to flash when the tag value is ON
or OFF.
Analog ITEM:
Set the threshold values for starting and stopping the graphic object flashing.
The settings for the threshold values are the same as for showing and hiding
tag settings.
Refer to the description for the Showing or Hiding Tag Settings above.
171
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
5-4-7
Grouping Graphic Objects
Multiple graphic objects can be grouped so that they will be treated as a single
graphic object. (See note.)
Grouped graphic objects can be saved in individual files.
The grouped objects then can be imported and used in other Graphic Screens
by reading the saved files.
Note
Groups cannot include jump objects and FP switch objects.
Grouping Graphic Objects
1,2,3...
1. In the Graphic Builder Window, select the graphic objects that are to be
grouped.
2. Right-click and select Group Objects from the pop-up menu. (Alternatively, select Group Objects from the Edit Menu.)
The selected graphic objects will be grouped and the color of the lines in
the frame will change to green.
Changing the Settings for Individual Graphic Objects in a Group
1,2,3...
1. Select the grouped graphic object.
2. Within the grouped graphic object, double-click the individual object for
which the settings are to be changed.
3. Right-click and select Properties from the pop-up menu.
The settings for individual graphic objects can then be changed as shown
below.
Note
Individual graphic objects within a group cannot be moved to another display
position, deleted, resized, or copied.
To perform any of these operations, first use the following procedure to
ungroup the graphic objects.
1. Double-click the grouped graphic object to select it.
2. Right-click and select Ungroup Objects from the pop-up menu.
172
Section 5-4
Creating Graphic Screens
Saving Grouped Graphic Objects
1,2,3...
1. With the grouped object selected, select Save Group File from the File
Menu.
2. The Save As Dialog Box will be displayed.
Input the file name and click the Save Button.
The grouped graphic object data will be saved (file name extension: ITM).
Note
Settings related to tags set for individual graphic objects will not be saved.
Set the tags as required when reading and using grouped graphic objects that
have been saved.
Loading Grouped Graphic Objects
1,2,3...
1. Select Load Group File from the File Menu.
2. The Open Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the group file that is to be
read, and click the Open Button.
3. The grouped graphic object will be loaded to the Graphic Screen.
173
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
4. Tag settings are not saved for grouped graphic objects in the files. Rightclick and select Properties to set the graphic object properties individually.
5-5
Screen Configuration
This section explains how to perform operations to configure the CX-Process
Monitor Plus Screen.
Use the CRT Builder to configure the following screens.
Overview Screen
• Control Screen
• Trend Screen
• Batch Trend Screen
• Segment Program 2 Screen
• Graphic Screen (You must create this screen beforehand. Refer to 53 System Monitor Settings.)
• Annunciator Screen
Alarm Log Screen
Operation Guide Screen
Note
The Tuning Screen is created automatically when the Control Screen is registered.
When all screens have been configured, save their settings.
5-5-1
CRT Builder Functions
Starting the CRT Builder
In the Setup Dialog Box, click the CRT Builder Button.
Click here.
The CRT Builder Window will be displayed.
174
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
CRT Builder Menu
The CRT Builder menu contains the following functions.
Menu
Commands
Settings Create Overview
Screen
Register Screen
CRT Builder Toolbar
View
Delete
Save
Exit
Toolbars
Function
Add a new Overview Screen based on the current
Overview Screen.
Set and register screen items.
Enabled only when you have selected screen items
using the Screen Management Tree.
Deletes registered screen items.
Saves setting in CRT Builder.
Ends the application.
Select whether to display or hide toolbars.
Help
About CRT Builder
Display the CRT Builder version information.
The CRT Builder toolbar contains the following functions.
Set and Save
Set and Delete
Set and Register Screen
Set and Create Overview Screen
(Enabled only when JOB is
selected)
175
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
5-5-2
Overview of Screen Registration
This section explains how to register the Overview Screen and set and register the sub-elements of the Overview Screen given below.
• Control Screen
• Trend Screen
• Batch Trend Screen
• Segment Program 2 Screen
• Graphic Screen (You must create the Graphic Screen beforehand. Refer to 5-4 Creating Graphic Screens.)
• Annunciator Screen
Note
The Tuning Screen is created automatically when the tag name is allocated.
Registering the Overview Screen
1,2,3...
1. Start CRT Builder, and then in the CRT Builder’s Screen Management
Tree, select JOB, and then select Setting, and then select Create Overview Screen. The CRT Builder Dialog Box will be displayed.
Enter the name of the Overview Screen
using 8 full-width characters or 16
half-width characters. Make sure to enter
a name for the Overview Screen.
Note
176
Make sure to enter a name for the Overview Screen. If you do not enter a
name, you will be unable to move to the Overview Screen.
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
2. Enter a screen name, and then click the OK Button.
The Overview Screen will be registered, and the name of the screen you
entered will be displayed in the Screen Management Tree.
Set and register the
following screens.
Control Screen
Trend Screen
Graphic Screen
Annunciator Screen
Screen Management
Tree
3. Select the screen item, and then select Set, and then select Register
Screen (or double-click the screen item), to set and register the screens.
Settings differ for each screen item. Refer to later in this manual for how to
set each screen.
Setting the Screen Tag
Names
Note
To specify the Function Block data within the Loop Control Unit/Board, specify
a tag name when registering each screen.
To specify the tag name, you must create a Monitor Tag file (select Execute,
and then select Compile Monitor Tags) using CX-Process Tool (on Windows
NT). If you do not create a tag file for Monitor Plus, you cannot specify tag
names from CX-Process Monitor Plus.
There are two types of tag names:
1,2,3...
1. Tag names for function blocks. If specifying tag names for Function Blocks,
specify the function block ITEMs using tag ITEM. (See note.)
177
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
Note
Tag ITEM is a fixed name allocated beforehand to specific ITEMs
(PV, SP, and MV, etc.) for a specific Function Block (Control Block,
and part of the Operation Block). Refer to Appendix A Reading/
Writing Function Block ITEMs for details.
2. Tag names for analog ITEMs and contact ITEMs.
Refer to the following table for the relation between each screen and the tag
name/tag ITEM given above.
Screen
1
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
--Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
2
tag names for
analog ITEMs and
contact ITEMs
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
(See note.)
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
Can be specified
tag names for
function blocks
Control Screen
Trend Screen
Batch Trend Screen
Segment Program 2
Screen
Graphic Screen
Annunciator Screen
Operation Guide
Screen
Alarm Log Screen
Note
Tag ITEMs for the
function block
Only optional tags can be set.
Example 1
Specifying the Function Block for the Control Screen as Function Block with
tag name “ABC.”
Tag name
ABC
CX-Process
Monitor Plus
Control Screen
Tag name: Specify ABC
Loop Control
Unit/Board
Example 2
Specifying the analog ITEM for the Trend Screen trends as Function Block
Tag ITEM “MV” for tag name “ABC.”
Tag name
Tag ITEM
178
ABC
MV
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
CX-Process
Monitor Plus
Trend Screen
Tag name:
Specify ABC
Tag ITEM: Specify MV
Loop Control
Unit/Board
Example 3
Specifying the Trend Screen trend as analog ITEM for tag name “IN1.”
Tag name
CX-Process
Monitor Plus
IN1
Trend Screen
Tag name: Specify IN1
Loop Control
Unit/Board
Changing Monitor Tag File
Paths
When the Run Button in the Main Window is clicked, Monitor Tag files are
saved under fixed file names in the directory where the Monitor Tag file application paths are set.
File names: mtagmst and mtagsubmst
It is possible to create several Monitor Tag files and to switch between them by
changing the application path. By creating new Monitor Tag files in a directory
different from the default one and changing the application path to this directory, you can change the Monitor Tag files that are used by Monitor Plus. The
procedure is as follows:
1,2,3...
1. In the Main Window, click the Setup Button. A box for entering the password will be displayed.
179
Screen Configuration
Section 5-5
2. Enter the password and click the OK Button. The following Setup dialog
Box will be displayed.
3. Click the DB Path Button. The following dialog box will be displayed.
4. The current path setting is displayed in the Setting DB Path field.
5. Click the Browse Button and specify the new path in the dialog box that is
displayed.
6. Select Yes in the Create New DB field and click the Execute Button.
When the Run Button is clicked in the Main Window, initialized Monitor Tag
files will be created at the specified path, and the application path will
change to the specified one (i.e., the Monitor Tag files used by CX-Process
Monitor Plus will change to the newly created ones).
180
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
Note (a) Several files are created. Therefore, if a folder that is used only for
Monitor Tag files is not specified, the Monitor Tag files will be created in the same folder as other files.
(b) Empty files are created when Yes is selected in the Create New
DB field. Therefore, Monitor Plus must be restarted by selecting
Execute - Output Tag File - Monitor Plus Tag from CX-Process
Tool.
(c) Some time is required until the new DB is created.
To return the Monitor Tag files that are use to the ones at the original path,
select No in the Create New DB field and click the Execute Button. The
application path will change to the original one (i.e., the files that CX-Process Monitor Plus uses will change to the ones corresponding to the original path.) If, however, there are no Monitor Tag files at the specified path,
an error will occur when the monitor process is started (i.e., when the Run
Button is clicked in the Main Window or in the Setup Dialog Box).
Note
Specifying No in the Create New DB field is used to return the application path to the original one after it has been changed by specifying Yes in the Create New DB field.
Registering Control Screens
1,2,3...
1. Select Screen in the Overview Screen sub-elements using Screen Management Tree in CRT Builder.
Click to select. Double-click to omit Step
2 of the operation.
2. From the Settings menu, select Register Screen, or double-click Screen.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
Select Control screen
3. Select Control screen, and then click the New Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
You can register up to eight function blocks in the Control Screen. Specify
the function blocks using tag names.
181
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
Enter the name of the
Control Screen using16
characters.
Select the box. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
Deletes the
registered Tags.
When you
register a Tag,
the button is
enabled.
Select the tag name corresponding to
the function block, analog ITEM, or
contact ITEM you want to register, and
then click the OK Button.
As shown in the screen on the right, you
can allocate up to eight tag names.
When you select a tag name, the Details Button is enabled.
Select the box. The following dialog box will be displayed.
When you select this box, the
Manual Pointer is not
displayed. Refer to the next
page for details of displays.
Select this box, and then
select the direction MV will
open. If you do not specify a
direction, no direction will be
displayed. Refer to the next
page for details of displays.
Displays the settings
made using
CX-Process Tool. You
cannot change the
settings.
Select this box to set the
Prominent Tag. When setting the
Prominent Tag, the following mark
will be added to the icon on the
Overview Screen, as shown.
Make the settings, and then click the
OK Button.
The Manual Pointer and MV
direction settings will be reflected in
the MV adjustment area in the lower
part of the instrument diagram.
Refer to the next page for details of
displays.
182
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
MV Adjustment Area Display in the Lower Part of the Instrument Diagram
MV open direction
enabled (0% side)
MV open direction
enabled (100% side)
MV open direction
disabled
Manual ON
Manual
Pointer
enabled
Manual Pointer
disabled
4. Enter the Screen Name, set the Tag No. and Detailed Settings, the click the
OK Button.
The Control Screen will be registered, and the Screen Name you have entered will be displayed on the Screen Management Tree.
Registering Trend Screens
You can register up to 60 Realtime Trend Screens, and up to 120 Historical
Trend Screens.
1,2,3...
1. Select the Overview Screen’s sub-element Screen in the CRT Builder’s
Screen Management Tree.
Click to select. Double-click to omit
Step 2 of the operation.
2. In the Settings Menu, select Register Screen, or double-click Screen.
The dialog box shown in Step 2 of the preceding section, Control Screen
Registration, will be displayed.
3. Select the Trend Screen, and then click the New Button.
The following dialog box will appear.
You can register a maximum to eight analog ITEMs (PV, SP, MV, or other
analog signals), or eight contact ITEMs in the Trend Screen. Specify analog ITEMs or contact ITEMs using either a) or b) below.
a. Tag name and relevant Tag ITEM (either PV, SP, or MV) corresponding
to the function block.
b.
The tag name corresponding to the analog ITEM or contact ITEM.
183
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
Please a check here to enable automatically
saving a CSV file. When automatic saving
has been enabled, the save period (time),
save destination folder, save file name, and
browse button will be enabled.
Select the Trend type.
Click the box. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
Enter the name of the Overview
Screen using 16 characters.
Deletes the registered tags. When
you register a tag, the button is
enabled.
Select a) the tag name for the Function
Block (including the analog ITEMs you
want to register), or b) the tag name for
the for the analog ITEMs or contact ITEMs
you want to register. In this example, the
tag name for the Function Block for a) has
been specified.
As shown in the screen on the right, you
can allocate up to eight tag names.
4. Enter the Screen Name, set the Trend Type, and then select Tag No.
When you register the tag name, the dialog box will change as follows:
Select the box. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
Select the Tag ITEM corresponding to
the analog ITEM you want to register. In
this example, Tag ITEM PV" for the
Function Block for tag name 4B009 has
been selected.
Select the box. The following dialog box will be
displayed.
Normally, there is no need to make settings because
they are set automatically.
Part of the data (PID constants, etc.), however, may not
match the display on the chart. Set the settings for the
High Limit and Low Limit for this data only.
5. Set Configure Tag No., Tag ITEM, and Detailed Settings, and then click
the OK Button.
184
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
The Trend Screen will be registered, and the name of the screen you entered will be displayed in the Screen Management Tree.
Saving to an CSV File
Automatically saving to an CSV file is described below.
To automatically save a CSV file, check Autosave enable on the above screen
and then make the following settings.
Interval (hours)
The time can be set to 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 12, 18, 20, 24, 48, 72, 86, 120, or 240
hours. The default for Real Time Trends is 12 hours, and the default for Historical Trends is 240 hours.
Folder
Specify the folder in which to save the file. The Browse Button can be use to
simplify setting the folder.
Filename
Specify the name of the file to save. Do not specify the file name extension.
The actual name of the file that is saved will be as follows:
filename_data_time.csv
For example, if a file called RealTimeTrend is saved at 16:15:10 on December
1 2006, the file name RealTimeTrend_20061201_161510.csv will be created
automatically.
185
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
Registering Batch Trend
Screens
1,2,3...
A maximum of 120 Batch Trend Screens can be registered.
1. Select Screen in the Overview Screen sub-elements using the Screen
Management Tree in the Builder Window.
Click to select.
Double-click to omit step 2 of the
procedure.
2. Select Register Screen from the Settings Menu, or double-click Screen.
The dialog box displayed in step 2 of Registering Control Screens, above,
will be displayed.
3. Select Batch Trend Screen and then click the New Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
A maximum of eight analog ITEMs (PV, SP, MV, or other analog signals) or
eight contact ITEMs can be registered as data collection ITEMs in a Batch
Trend Screen.
Also, one analog ITEM (PV, SP, MV, or other analog signal) or contact
ITEM can be registered to serve as the trigger for starting batch collection.
Specify analog or contact ITEMs using either method (1) or (2) below.
(1) Tag numbers (tag names) and tag ITEMs (PV, SP, or MV) for the function block
(2) Tag numbers (tag names) for analog or contact ITEMs
Set the trigger for collecting trend data
and set the collection cycle.
Make the settings for automatically
saving trend data collection results
as CSV files when trend data
collection is finished.
Set the ITEM for data collection in the
Batch Trend Screen.
• Click a box. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
• Select (1) for the tag name for the
function block (including the analog
ITEM to be registered) or (2) for the
tag name for the analog ITEM or
contact ITEM to be registered. In this
example, the tag name for the
function block is specified.
• As shown on the screen to the right,
one tag can be allocated for eight
tag triggers for collection.
186
Input the name of the Batch Trend Screen, using up
to 16 characters.
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
4. Input the screen name.
5. Set the batch trend basic settings as shown below.
Select the batch trend
collection cycle (1 or 60 s).
• Set the tag to serve as a trigger for start
collecting trend data.
Note: The trigger tag setting is not required. Trend data collection can also be started using a procedure
from the Batch Trend Screen.
• Click the box to display the dialog box
shown below.
• Select the tag ITEM for the analog ITEM
that is to be registered. In this example, a
tag ITEM (PV) with the tag name
"UL_3001_00" is selected.
Select the operation for when the trigger condition is
satisfied for collecting data when the CX-Process Monitor
Plus is restarted.
• Selected:
Continue collecting data to the same batch trend file when
the CX-Process Monitor Plus is restarted.
• Not selected:
Begin collecting data to a new batch trend file when the
CX-Process Monitor Plus is restarted.
• Displayed when a trigger tag ITEM is set.
• Click the box to display one of the following dialog boxes according to the
type of ITEM (analog or contact) that is selected.
• Analog ITEM:
Set the batch start and stop values.
If the batch start value is greater than the batch stop value:
Batch collection will start when the trigger ITEM value is equal to or
greater than the batch start value.
Batch collection will stop when the trigger ITEM value is less than the
batch stop value.
If the batch start value is less than the batch stop value:
Batch collection will start when the trigger ITEM value is less than the
batch start value.
Batch collection will stop when the trigger ITEM value is equal to or
greater than the batch stop value.
• Contact ITEM:
Set the condition (either when ON or when OFF) for starting the batch
collection.
187
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
6. Select the tag number for the batch trend collection. Register the tag name
and then set Detail as described below.
• Click the box to display the dialog box
shown below.
• Select the tag ITEM for the analog
ITEM that is to be registered. In this
example, a function block tag ITEM
(PV) with the tag name "Tag001" is
selected.
• Click the box to display the dialog box shown below.
• These settings are normally made automatically. It is
possible, however, that certain data (such as a PID
constant) may not match the display on the chart. In
cases such as that, the upper and lower limit settings
must be changed.
7. Select the option to enable auto-saving of CSV files (described below).
8. Click the OK Button.
The Batch Trend Screen will be registered and the screen name that was
input will be displayed on the Screen Management Tree.
Note
Setting Auto-saving of
CSV Files
If a setting is changed while the Continue previous batch when restarted
option is selected, the following dialog box will be displayed.
To make the change, click the OK Button. To cancel the change, click the Cancel Button.
The CSV file auto-save function is described below.
Enabling Auto-saving
When Auto-save enable is selected, a CSV file is automatically created when
the condition for the batch collection is stopped.
Destination Folder for Saved Files
Specify the destination folder for saved files at Destination folder to save.
The folder can be found by using the Browse Button. Within the destination
folder, folders will be automatically created for the dates on which the batch
collections are started, and the CSV files will be saved in those folders.
188
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
For example, if the destination is C:\BatchTrend, and the batch collection was
started on December 1, 2006, the folders will be created under
C:\BatchTrend\20061201\. (The underlined portion is the date on which the
batch collection was started.)
File Name
Specify the name of the file to be saved. (Note: Do not specify the file name
extension here.)
The actual name of the file that is saved will be as follows:
start_date-start_time-filename.csv
(The start date and the start time are the time information for when the
trend data collection was started for the file that is being saved.)
For example, if the name of the file being saved is BatchTrend, and the batch
collection was started at 16:15:10 on December 1, 2006, the file name
20061201-161510-BatchTrend.csv will be created automatically.
Registering Segment
Program 2 Screens
1,2,3...
There are two types of Segment Program 2 Screens: a Segment Program 2
Monitor Screen and a Segment Program 2 Edit Screen. Up to 16 pairs of Segment Program 2 Screens can be registered.
1. Select Screen in the Overview Screen sub-elements using the Screen
Management Tree in the Builder Window.
Click to select.
Double-click to omit step 2 of the
procedure.
2. Select Register Screen from the Settings Menu, or double-click Screen.
The dialog box displayed in step 2 of Registering Control Screens above
will be displayed.
3. Select Segment Program 2 Screen and then click the New Button. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Aside from the Segment Program 2 tags, one analog ITEM (PV, SP, MV, or
other analog signal) and one contact ITEM can be registered as an optional tag.
Specify analog or contact ITEMs using either method 1 or 2 below.
(1) Tag numbers (tag names) and tag ITEMs (PV, SP, or MV) for the function block.
(2) Tag numbers (tag names) for analog or contact ITEMs.
189
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
Set the Segment Program 2 collection
cycle and the operation for when the
CX-Process Monitor Plus is restarted.
Input the Segment Program 2 Screen name, using up
to 16 characters.
Set the ITEM for data collection in the
Segment Program 2 Screens.
• Click a box. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
• Select (1) for the tag name for the
function block (including the analog
ITEM to be registered), or (2) for the
tag name for the analog ITEM or
contact ITEM to be registered. In this
example, the tag name for the
function block is specified.
When a Segment Program 2 tag is
selected, nothing but that tag can be
selected.
• As shown on the screen to the right,
one tag can be allocated for one
optional tag for Segment Program 2.
Make the settings for automatically saving segment data collection results
as CSV files when segment data collection is finished.
4. Set the screen name.
5. Set the Segment Program 2 Screen basic settings as shown below.
Select the Segment
Program 2 collection cycle
(1, 10, or 60 s).
Select the operation for when the CX-Process Monitor Plus is
restarted while the Segment Program 2 Block S1 (ITEM 013)
is ON.
• Selected:
Continue collecting data to the same Segment Program 2
trend file when the CX-Process Monitor Plus is restarted.
• Not selected:
Begin collecting data to a new Segment Program 2 trend file
when the CX-Process Monitor Plus is restarted.
6. Select the Segment 2 Program to be monitored on the Segment 2 Program
Monitor Screen, and if required select an optional tag. After selecting the
tag, set Detail as described below.
190
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
• Click the box to display the dialog box shown
below.
Click the box to display the dialog box shown below.
• These settings are normally made automatically.
• It is possible, however, that certain data (such as a
Make the scaling settings for the Segment Program
2 tag. Make changes as required.
• Click a box to display the dialog box
shown below.
• Select the Segment 2 Program tag to be
monitored on the Segment 2 Program
Screen.
(There is no need to select a tag ITEM
for the Segment 2 Program tag.)
• Select an optional tag if required.
Select the tag ITEM for the analog ITEM
that is to be registered. In this example,
a function block tag ITEM (PV) with the
tag name "UL_2000" is selected.
PID constant) may not match the display on the chart.
In cases such as that, the upper and lower limit
settings must be changed.
• The Faceplate Button is enabled when the tag name is selected.
• Click the box to display the dialog box shown below.
When this option is selected, the Manual
Pointer is not displayed.
Select this option, and
then select the direction the MV will open.
If a direction is not
specified, no direction
will not be displayed.
Displays the settings
made using the CXProcess Tool. These
settings cannot be
changed.
Select this option to set the Prominent
Tag.
A mark will be added to the upper
right of the faceplate on the Segment
Program 2 Edit Screen.
• Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
• The Manual Pointer and MV direction settings will be reflected in the MV
adjustment area in the lower part of the instrument diagram.
7. Select the option to enable auto-saving of CSV files (described below).
8. Click the OK Button.
The Segment Program 2 Screen will be registered and the screen name
that was input will be displayed on the Screen Management Tree.
Note
If a setting is changed while the Continue previous segment trend when
restarted Option is selected, the following dialog box will be displayed.
To make the change, click the OK Button. To cancel the change, click the
Cancel Button.
191
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
Setting Auto-saving of
CSV Files
The CSV file auto-save function is described below.
Enabling Auto-saving
When Auto-save enable is selected, a CSV file is automatically created when
operation of the relevant Segment Program 2 Block is stopped, i.e., when S1
(ITEM 013) turns OFF.
Destination Folder for Saved Files
Specify the destination folder for saved files in the Destination folder to save
Box.
The folder can be found by using the Browse Button. Within the destination
folder, folders will be automatically created for the dates on which the batch
collections are started, and the CSV files will be saved in those folders.
For example, if the destination is C:\Segment, and the data collection was
started on December 1, 2006, the folders will be created under C:\Segment\20061201\. (The underlined portion is the date on which the data collection was started.)
File Name
Specify the name of the file to be saved. (Note: Do not specify the file name
extension here.)
The actual name of the file that is saved will be as follows:
start_date-start_time- filename.csv
(The start date and the start time are the time information for when the segment data collection was started for the file that is being saved.)
For example, if the name of the file being saved is Segment, and the data collection was started at 16:15:10 on December 1, 2006, the file name
20061201-161510-Segment.csv will be created automatically.
Note
Registering Graphic
Screens
If the data in a single CSV file exceeds 65,000 lines, another CSV file will be
created. The CSV files will be saved in order with _01.CSV, _02.CSV, etc.,
added at the end of the file name.
You can register up to 200 Graphic Screens.
Note
Before registering the Graphic Screen, you must create and save the Graphic
Screen using the Graphic Builder Button. Refer to 5-4 Creating Graphic
Screens for how to create a Graphic Screen.
The registration procedure is as follows:
192
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
1,2,3...
1. Select Screen in the Overview Screen sub-elements using Screen Management Tree in CRT Builder.
Click to select. Double-click to
omit Step 2 of the operation.
2. From the Settings menu, select Register Screen, or double-click Screen.
The dialog box shown in Step 2 of the proceeding Control Screen Registration will be displayed.
3. Select Graphic Screen, and then click the New Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
Select the Graphic Screen you created and saved using CRT Builder (i.e.,
the Graphic Builder Button).
Note
Before registering the Overview Screen, you must create and save
the Graphic Screen using CRT Builder.
Select the name of Graphic Screen
to be allocated.
All of the saved Graphic Screen
names will be displayed.
4. Select the screen name, and then click the OK Button.
The Overview Screen will be registered, and the name of the screen you
entered will be displayed in the Screen Management Tree.
Registering Annunciator
Screens
1,2,3...
You can register up to five Annunciator Screens. The registration procedure is
as follows:
1. Select the Overview Screen’s sub-element Screen in the CRT Builder’s
Screen Management Tree.
Click to select. Double-click to
omit Step 2 of the operation.
2. In the Settings Menu, select Register Screen, or double-click Screen.
The dialog box shown in Step 2 of the preceding section, Control Screen
Registration, will be displayed.
3. Select the Annunciator, and then click the New Button.
The following dialog box will appear.
193
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
You can register up to 16 contact ITEMs in the Annunciator Screen. Specify the contact ITEM using the tag name.
Enter the name of the
Control Screen using
16 characters.
Select the box. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
Set the tag name to display the following
Buttons.
Refer to the next page for how to set ITEMs
and Detailed Settings.
Click the Delete Button to delete the
registered Tag information.
Select a) the tag name for the function
block (including the contact ITEMs you
want to register), or b) the tag name for
the for the contact ITEMs you want to
register. In this example, the tag name
for the function block for a) has been
specified.
As shown in the screen on the right, you
can allocate up to 16 tag names.
Setting ITEMs
Select the tag name, and then click the ITEM Button. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
Select the Tag ITEM corresponding to the contact ITEM you want to set. In
this example, Tag ITEM “RL_SW” for the Function Block for tag name ATK001
has been selected. Next, click the OK Button.
194
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
Detailed Settings
Select the tag name, and then click the Details Button. The following dialog
box will be displayed.
Select the character display
color.
Enter the message to be displayed
on the Annunciator Screen. You can
enter up to eight full-width
characters x two rows.
Select Non-lock In (0), or Lock-in (1).
Select the sound type.
Click the Test Button to hear the sound selected.
Refer to 5-6 System Information Settings for
allocating sound files and sound numbers.
Select the background color.
Complete the settings, and then click the OK Button.
4. Make the above settings, and then click the OK Button.
The Annunciator Screen will be registered, and the name of the screen you
entered will be displayed in the Screen Management Tree.
5-5-3
Registering Operation Guide Messages
This section explains how to register Operation Guide Messages.
If the conditions registered here occur, the corresponding message will be displayed on the Operation Guide Log Screen, and saved.
1,2,3...
1. Select OpgLog Mess01 int the CRT Builder’s Screen Management Tree.
Click to select. Double-click to omit
Step 2 of the operation.
2. In the Settings Menu, select Register Screen, or double-click OpgLog
Mess01.
The following dialog box will appear.
195
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
You can register up to 1,000 contact ITEMs in the Operation Guide Messages. Specify the contact ITEM using the tag name.
Enter the name of the Overview
Screen using 16 characters.
Switch the page number.
Click the buttons to move up and down
the table of registered tag names.
The < and > Buttons will change the
tag numbers by 10 at a time and the
<< and >> Buttons will change the tag
numbers by 100 at a time.
Select the box. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
Select the tag name to display the Details
Button as shown.
Refer to the next page for how to set ITEM
and Detailed Settings.
Click the Delete Button to delete the registered Tag information.
Select a) the tag name for the function
block (including the contact ITEMs you
want to register), or b) the tag name for the
for the contact ITEMs you want to register.
In this example, the tag name for the function block for a) has been specified.
Setting Items
Select the tag name, and then click the ITEM Button. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
Select the Tag ITEM corresponding to the contact ITEM you want to set. In
this example, Tag ITEM “R/L_SW” for the Function Block for tag name
ATK001 has been selected. Next, click the OK Button.
196
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
Detailed Settings
Select the color of the
Operation Guide Screen
characters
Enter the message to be displayed on the
Operation Guide Screen. You can enter up
to 54 characters.
After completing the settings, click the OK Button.
3. After completing the above settings, click the OK Button.
The Operation Guide Message Screen will be registered, and the name of
the screen you entered will be displayed in the Screen Management Tree.
5-5-4
Registering Alarm Messages
This section explains how to register alarm messages.
If the conditions registered here occur, the corresponding alarm message will
be displayed in the second line of the Monitor Screen, and the alarm message
will be saved on the Alarm Log Screen.
1,2,3...
1. In the CRT Builder’s Screen Management Tree, select Register Alarm
Message.
Click to select. Double-click to
omit Step 2 of the operation.
2. From the Settings Menu, select Register Screen, or double-click ANN
LOG Mess.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
197
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
You can register up to 2,000 contact ITEMs in the alarm messages. Specify the setting ITEMs using the tag names.
Enter the name of the Alarm
Message Registration Screen
using 16 characters.
Switch the page numbers.
Click either button to move up
and down the table of
registered tag names below
by 10 at a time.
Select the box. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
Select the tag name to display the Details
Button as shown.
Refer to the next page for how to set ITEM
and Detailed Settings.
Click the Delete Button to delete the
registered Tag information.
Select a) the tag name for the function block
(including the contact ITEMs you want to
register), or b) the tag name for the for the
contact ITEMs you want to register. In this
example, the tag name for the function block for
a) has been specified.
Setting ITEMs
Select the tag name, and then click the ITEM Button. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
Select the Tag ITEM corresponding to the contact ITEM you want to set. In
this example, Tag ITEM “R/L_SW” for the Function Block for tag name
ATK001 has been selected. Next, click the OK Button.
198
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
Detailed Settings
Select the tag name, and then click the Details Button. The following dialog
box will be displayed.
Enter the alarm message. You can enter up
to 94 characters.
Set the timing to display the
messages
After making the settings, click the OK Button.
Display is red for an occurrence, and black following recovery.
3. Complete the above settings, and then click the OK Button.
The alarm message will be registered, and the name of the screen you entered will be displayed in the Screen Management Tree.
Automatic Allocation Function for Alarm Tags
Tags specified with the CX-Process Tool can be set as alarm tags. Alarm tags
can be displayed in the Alarm History Screens. The following tags can be set
as alarm tags.
• Tags for Monitor Plus for Internal Switch blocks
• Data in the User Link Table when the analog/digital type is set to a contact
Use to the following procedure to set alarm tags.
Internal Switch Blocks
1,2,3...
1. Select Internal Switch as the function block and select Monitor Plus tags
from the tag setting menu.
199
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
The following window will be displayed.
Click.
2. Select the Alarm Option, click the Register Button and then the End Button.
3. Compile the tags for Monitor Plus.
4. Start the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
User Link Table
1,2,3...
1. Open the User Link Table for editing.
2. To create a new entry in the user link table, right-click and select Register.
200
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
3. The following window will be displayed. Set the required items.
Must be set to a contact
to enable setting an
alarm tag.
Click.
Note
By using automatic allocations in the alarm monitor, alarm occurred (Auto
Alarm) will be displayed when the specified flag is ON and alarm reset (Auto
Alarm) will be displayed when the specified flag is OFF.
201
Section 5-5
Screen Configuration
5-5-5
Saving Settings
Save the screen configurations that you have set.
Note
1,2,3...
If setting or changing screen configurations, make sure to save the settings or
changes.
1. From the Settings Menu in the CRT Builder, select Save.
2. Click the OK Button.
5-5-6
Deleting Registered Screens
To delete registered screens, perform the following operation.
1,2,3...
1. In the CRT Builder’s Screen Management Tree, click to select the screen
you want to delete.
Click to select. Double-click to
omit Step 2 of the operation.
2. From the CRT Builder Settings Menu, select Delete.
3. Click the OK Button.
5-5-7
Starting the Monitor Process
To start the monitor process, perform the following operation.
1,2,3...
1. In the Main Window or in the Setup Dialog Box, click the Run Button.
2. The monitor process will start and the Overview Screen will be displayed.
202
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
5-6
System Information Settings
This section explains label information, alarm sound information, and how to
make the ten-key, color, and key-lock settings.
The contents of the settings are as follows:
Item
Label information
Alarm sound information
Ten-key settings
Color settings
Key-lock settings
Multi-screen settings
Auto-start settings
CSV file auto-save settings, trend settings
Contents
Label name
Label color
Allocate an alarm sound file to each alarm number (1 to
10).
Set whether you want to use the Ten-key Dialog Box when
entering numerical values. This setting will be enabled for
all Monitor Screens.
If you enable the ten-key, the Ten-key Dialog Box will be
displayed when you select the numerical input box.
Specify the color of the buttons used for the Function
Block diagrams in the Control Screen and Tuning Screen.
It is possible to prohibit the values of ITEMs being
changed from the Control Screen or the Tuning Screen.
Specify if multiple screens can be displayed and automatic exiting of the background window for the monitoring
process when automatically ending in operator mode.
Specify the order in which the pages are to change.
Specify the scale display (engineering units or percentages) for the Tuning and Trend Screens, the Tuning
Screen opening method, auto-starting, and the color of
alarms on Annunciator Screens.
Set the method for collecting Trend Screen, Batch Trend
Screen, and Segment Program 2 Screen data, and the
method for saving the data.
Alarm buzzer stop setting Set whether to sound the alarm buzzer when recovering
from an alarm.
Set whether to treat MHA and MLA as alarms.
Register a tag to stop the alarm.
Starting external applica- Allocate applications to start buttons 1 to 4.
tions
1,2,3...
1. In the Setup Dialog Box, click the System Info. Button.
Click here.
203
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
The following window will be displayed.
2. In the leftmost window, select Label information, Alarm sound information, Set ten-key, Set color, or Set key lock.
3. Perform the following settings as shown.
4. When you have completed all the settings, click the Save and Exit Button.
5-6-1
Label Information Settings
In the leftmost window, select Label Information. The screen shown in Step
1 will be displayed.
Set Label name and Label color.
204
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
5-6-2
Alarm Sound Information Settings
In the leftmost window, select Alarm sound information. The following
screen will be displayed.
Allocate a sound file to each alarm sound number to register the sound you
want to use.
Click the Test Button to try sounding the alarm.
205
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
5-6-3
Ten-key Settings
In the leftmost window, select Set ten-key. The following screen will be displayed.
Click the Use ten-key Button or the Don’t Use ten-key Button. The setting
will be enabled for all Monitor Screens.
If you set Use ten-key, when you select the input numerical value box, the
Input Data Dialog Box will be displayed.
Example
If you set Use Ten-key, when
you select the input numerical
value box, the Input Data Dialog
Box will be displayed.
Set the ten-key size to either large or small.
206
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
5-6-4
Color Settings
In the leftmost window, select Set color. The following screen will be displayed.
Color setting for the buttons used in the AUT/MAN/CAS/FIELD/CONT/PAUSE/START/STOP/RESET
Function Block diagrams
Color used to indicate
button is ON.
Color used to indicate
button is OFF.
Color used to indicate
button is ON.
Color used to indicate
button is OFF.
Color of Contact
output button
Color of Contact
input status
Color used to indicate
Contact input is ON.
Color used to indicate
Contact input is OFF.
Use the above screen to specify the color used for the AUT/MAN/CAS/FIELD/
CONT/PAUSE/START/STOP/RESET Function Block diagrams, the Contact
output buttons, and the Contact input status.
If the Display dialog box for confirming in pushing contact buttons setting is clicked, a confirmation dialog box like the one shown below will be displayed to confirm operation when a contact output button, like AUTO/MAN is
clicked.
5-6-5
Key-lock Settings
In the leftmost window, select Set key lock. The following screen will be displayed.
It is possible to prohibit changing specified ITEM values (e.g., changing SP
values or PID constants) of specified Function Blocks (e.g., Basic PID Block)
in screens, such as the Control Screen and the Tuning Screen, that can be
using for setting operations from the CX-Process Monitor Plus. These settings
are called “key locks.”
Note
Key-lock specifications are made in terms of block models (setting in terms of
the CX-Process Monitor Plus’s tag names is not possible).
207
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
Setting Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Select Block Model. The Function Blocks will be displayed below it.
2. To set key locks for all the analog and contact ITEMs of the Function Blocks
of the specified Block Model that can usually be changed using CX-Process Monitor Plus, click the All Select Button. Similarly, to clear the key
locks for all of the ITEMs, click the All Clear Button.
To set key locks for specific ITEMs, click in the check box of the required
ITEMs in either the analog ITEM or Contact ITEM fields.
3. Click the Save and exit Button to enable the key lock settings.
Operation with Key Locks Enabled
1,2,3...
1. If an attempt to change the value of an ITEM (e.g., SP) for which key lock
has been set (e.g., by pressing the SP Button), the following dialog box will
be displayed.
2. If Yes is clicked, the following dialog box, requesting entry of a password,
will be displayed. (If No is clicked, the operation to change the ITEM will be
cancelled.)
208
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
If the password set is entered (refer to 5-2-2 Setting Passwords), the key
lock for the ITEM will temporarily be cleared and it will be possible to
change the value. The next time, however, that an attempt to change the
value of the same ITEM is made, the key lock will be enabled and the
above procedure will have to be repeated.
5-6-6
Multi-screen Settings
If Multi-screen is selected, the following screen will be displayed.
The following settings can be made.
Multi-screen
Set whether or not more than one Overview Screen can be displayed at the
same time.
Setting the Order of Page
Changes
The order in which pages are changed when the Next and Previous Buttons
are clicked can be set to either the order they are registered in the database
or the order they are displayed in the Builder Window. Both realtime trends
and historical trends are treated in the same group.
209
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
Note
The first page in each group will be displayed when the Next Button is
pressed at the last page in the group. The last page in each group will be displayed when the Previous Button is pressed at the first page in the group.
Order of Database Registration
Pages will change in the order they are registered using the Builder Window.
Both realtime trends and historical trends are treated in the same group.
Example:
If the pages were registered in the order 1, 2, 3, then they will be displayed in
that order.
Note
When pages are changed using the Previous and Next Buttons while
Graphic Screens are being displayed, even Graphic Screens that are not registered in the Builder Window are displayed.
Order of Display
Pages will change in the order they are displayed in the Builder Window. Both
realtime trends and historical trends are treated in the same group.
Example:
The pages will be displayed in the order 1, 3, 2 regardless of the order in
which they were registered.
210
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
5-6-7
Auto-start Settings
If Auto-start is selected, the following screen will be displayed.
The following settings can be made.
Divisions in Tuning
Screen
Specify whether to use engineering units or percentages for the scale displayed in a Tuning Screen. The default is for percentages.
Tuning Screen List
Specify whether to input the tag name directly or to select the tag name from a
pull-down menu when switching to a Tuning Screen by clicking in the upper
left corner of an Overview Screen.
211
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
Pull-down Menu
Note
5-6-8
Dialog Box
If the number of tags registered in the Control Screen exceeds 192, the Dialog
Box will be displayed, even if the Pull-down menu is specified.
Auto-start
Specify whether to open a specified screen when the CX-Process Monitor
Plus is started or to start normally. If the auto-start is enabled, the screen
specified in the fields below will be displayed automatically when the CX-Process Monitor Plus is started from the menus. (This eliminates the need to click
the Run Button on the Main Window.)
CRT-ID
Set the type of screen. 1: Overview, 2: Control, 3: Trend, 4: Graphic, 5: Annunciator, 10: Tuning, 17: Batch Trend, 18: Segment.
Group Number
The group number specifies the order of registration by the CRT Builder (0 to
400).
Position
Specify the position on the function block diagram between 1 and 8. This setting is valid only for Tuning Screens.
Disabling Auto-start
The auto-start setting can be disabled by either of the following two methods.
• Double-click the MonitorCom.exe file from your Explorer to open the System Information settings and disable auto-starting under the Auto-start
settings.
• Click the right mouse button at the top of an Overview Display and then
click the Yes Button on the dialog box that will appear to open the System
Information settings. Disable auto-starting under the Auto-start settings
Note
212
The CRT-ID, group number, and position can be confirmed by clicking at the
top of a screen as shown below.
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
Click here.
CRT-ID and other
information
displayed here.
Disabling Auto-start
The auto-start setting can be disabled by using either of the following two
methods.
1,2,3...
1. Double-click the MonitorCom.exe file from Explorer to independently open
the System Information settings (which include label information, alarm
sound information, ten-key, color, and key lock settings) and disable autostarting under the Auto-start settings.
2. If the auto-start is enabled, right-click at the top of an Overview Screen and
then click the Yes Button in the dialog box that will appear to open the System Information settings. Disable auto-starting under the Auto-start settings.
Note
In Windows Vista, the following dialog box will be displayed when you change
the automatic run settings. This is generated by the Windows Vista User
Account Control and it does not indicate any problem. Select to allow access.
213
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
5-6-9
CSV File Auto-save Settings
If Set auto-save of CSV file is selected, the following screen will be displayed.
Error Check Capacity
when Saving Files
Set the amount of disk space at which to generate an alarm or error when the
drive in which the CSV file is being saved starts becoming full. Setting the values as megabytes. An alarm or error will be generated when the drive set to
save the CSV file in for Trend Screens reaches the specified level or lower.
Set the disk space within the following ranges for an alarm or error to be generated.
Disk space for generating an alarm: 10 to 5,000 MB (Default: 1,000 MB)
Disk space for generating an error: 1 to 4,999 MB (Default: 100 MB)
The CX-Process Monitor Plus does not provide functions to delete or overwrite old files.
Note
214
Although different drives can be set for the Trend Screens, the error and alarm
settings are used for all of them.
System Information Settings
Trend Settings: Realtime
Trend and Historical Trend
Collection Cycles
Section 5-6
The trend data collection cycles on the Trend Screen are set separately for
realtime trends (1 to 30 s) and historical trends (1 to 60 min).
When a collection cycle setting is changed, one of the following dialog boxes
will be displayed.
Click the OK Button to make the change, or click the Cancel Button to cancel
the change.
Batch Trend File Retention
Period
Select the option to have batch trend files created on the Batch Trend Screen
deleted after a fixed period has elapsed.
Then set the number of days (from 10 to 36,600) for the batch trend file retention period.
By default this function is enabled and the retention period is set at 366 days.
Segment Program 2 File
Retention Period
Select the option to have segment trend files created on the Segment Program 2 Screen deleted after a fixed period has elapsed.
Then set the number of days (from 10 to 36,600) for the segment trend file
retention period.
By default this function is enabled and the retention period is set at 366 days.
215
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
5-6-10 Setting for Stopping Alarm Sound
Alarm Reset Settings
These settings specify whether or not an alarm sound will be produced when
alarms are reset. There are separate settings for process alarms and system
alarms.
• Process Alarms
An alarm message is displayed in the Alarm Log Screen.
• System Alarms
An alarm message is displayed in the System Monitor Screen.
Enable process alarm sounds
to produce a sound when an
alarm message is displayed in
the Alarm Log Screen.
Enable system alarm sounds
to produce a sound when an
alarm message is displayed in
the System Monitor Screen.
Both alarms are disabled by default.
Note
216
When the alarm sound is disabled, no sound will be produced when the alarm
is reset, but the alarm event will remain in the alarm log.
System Information Settings
MHA and MLA Alarm
Setting
Section 5-6
This setting specifies whether or not the MHA and MLA ITEM tags are treated
as alarms. If MHA and MLA are treated as alarms, an alarm event will be
recorded in the Alarm Log when MHA or MLA goes ON. If the alarm output is
disabled, alarm events will not remain in the Alarm Log.
When the alarm output is
enabled, MHA and MLA events
will be recorded in the Alarm Log.
217
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
Alarm Stop Function
All alarm sounds can be silenced when the specified tag is ON.
When this function is enabled and the specified tag is ON, all alarm sounds
(such as process alarms, system alarms, and annunciator alarms) will be
stopped.
If the alarm is enabled, all
alarm will be stopped when
the specified tag is ON.
Select the tag that will silence
alarms.
Setting the Alarm Stop Tag
Click the Browse Button next to the Tag Name field to display the following
dialog box. Select the tag name of the tag that will control alarm sounds and
click the OK Button.
Contact tags in the user link table or internal switch tags can be specified as
alarm stop tags.
Note
218
The following dialog box will be displayed if a tag name longer than 16 characters is input directly into this field. In this case, input an existing tag name that
is up to 16 characters long.
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
The following dialog box will be displayed if a non–existent tag name is input. In this case, click the Browse Button and select a tag name.
Time Chart of Alarm Stop Tag Operation
Alarm sounds ON
Alarm sounds silenced
Verify operation
Alarm Stop Tag
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Pattern 4
Verify operation
Alarm Stop Tag
Pattern 5
Pattern 6
219
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
5-6-11 Settings Required to Start External Applications
A specified external application can be started while Monitor Plus is in use.
Set the application name, application path, and argument for the desired
external application in this window. The argument is executed by being
passed to the external application.
Settings
Buttons and Application Name
Set the external application names allocated to the external application start
buttons on the screen as follows:
• Buttons:
The characters set here are displayed on the external application start
buttons.
• Application name:
The application names set here are displayed as pop-ups on the
screen.
External application
start button
220
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
Path of Application
Set the path to the application that you want to execute.
Argument
Set the argument to pass to the external application. If the argument contains
a space, enclose the argument in double quotation marks.
For example, make the following settings to open the file C:\Project
Folder\TagList.csv with Microsoft Excel:
Application name: Excel
Application path: C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\Office10\EXCEL.EXE
Argument: C:\Project Folder\TagList.csv
Options
Select one of the following two display methods for when an external application is started from the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Open Monitor Plus Screen from the External Application.
The CX-Process Monitor Plus display will be removed and the external application will be displayed over the entire screen.
Utilize Launcher Screen.
The external application will be displayed with a part of the CX-Process Monitor Plus Screen (the Launcher Window) remaining.
Starting an External
Application
To start an external application, click the external application’s start button.
External application
start button
The preset application name will
be displayed as a popup label.
Re-displaying CX-Process
Monitor Plus from an
External Application
When Open Monitor Plus Screen from the External Application Is
Selected
From the external application, execute Hmene.exe with no argument.
This file is installed in the system folder, so there is no need to specify the
path.
Even if the CX-Process Monitor Plus Screen is not displayed while the external application is running, processes such as alarm monitoring and
trend collection continue.
When Utilize Launcher Screen Is Selected
When an external application has been started, only the top of the Monitor
Plus Window will be displayed, as shown in the following diagram.
To return to the original Screen, click any one of the Buttons in the area shown
below.
221
Section 5-6
System Information Settings
Click any of these Buttons to restore the original Screen.
When the external application’s Window is maximized, the Monitor Plus Window may be hidden in the background behind the external application. In this
case, adjust the external application’s window size if necessary.
Note
222
When a user–created external application is started, it may have some effect
on Monitor Plus. Consider the effects of the external application on Monitor
Plus before starting the external application.
Section 5-7
Checking Configurations
5-7
Checking Configurations
Start the monitor process with the Setup Button in the Main Window, and display the Overview Screen to check that the screen configurations have been
set correctly.
Refer to the sections from 4-5 onwards for details on operations on Monitor
Screens selected from the Overview Screen.
Select Start, Program, Omron, CX-Process Monitor Plus, and CX-Process Monitor Plus.
In the Main Window, click the Setup Button.
Enter the password.
In the Setup Dialog Box, click the Run Button.
Start the Monitor Process for the screen you have configured, and start FinsGateway Serial Unit communications.
(See note.)
Note Set the FinsGateway communications type (Host Link), the COM port used by the Host Link, and
the baud rate using the configuration's System Monitor Setting Window. You must start the
FinsGateway Controller Link and Ethernet manually.
In the Overview Screen, select the Control Screen, Trend Screen, etc., and check their operation.
(To enable auto-starting to an Overview Screen)
Click the System info. Button in the Setup Dialog and set the Auto-start-Auto-start setting to Enable.
5-7-1
Starting the Monitor Process and Displaying the Overview
Window
1,2,3...
1. In the Main Window, click the Setup Button.
A dialog box will be displayed to input the password.
2. Input the password and click the OK Button.
The Setup Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Click the Run Button.
4. The Monitor Process will start and the Setup Dialog Box will be closed.
Only if using Serial (i.e., Host Link) communications, FinsGateway Serial
Unit communications with the PLC will start according to the following communications conditions set using the System Monitor Setting Window (using the System Monitor Builder Button in the Setup Dialog Box) at the same
time as the Monitor Process starts. Unless Initialize Serial Port in the Serial Communications Detailed Settings Dialog Box is selected, however,
communications will not start automatically. Refer to 5-3 System Monitor
Settings for details.
• Communications type: Serial (Host Link)
• COM port used and baud rate (if using Host Link)
223
Section 5-7
Checking Configurations
Note (a) PLC network address, node address, and Unit address communications are based upon the settings made using the CX-Process Tool (select Settings, Network Settings). (Set the node
address and Unit address using the System Monitor Settings
Window to use the System Monitor Screen).
(b) If using Controller Link or Ethernet, you must start FinsGateway
communications manually. (Set Controller Link and Ethernet
communications type using the System Monitor Settings Window
to use the System Monitor Screen).
(c) In Windows Vista, the following dialog box will be displayed when
you execute FinsGateway automatic settings. This is generated
by the Windows Vista User Account Control and it does not indicate any problem. Select to allow access.
5. The Overview Screen will be displayed as shown in Section 4-5 Overview
Screen. Check to make sure that screens selected and set in the Overview
Screen are operating correctly. For details on individual screens, refer to
the sections from 4-7 onwards.
5-7-2
Setting the Auto-start Function
1,2,3...
1. Click the System Info. Button in the Setup Dialog Box.
2. Select Auto-start.
3. Set Auto-start to Enable.
Note
If the auto-start function is enabled, an Overview Screen will be displayed as
soon as the CX-Process is started. The auto-start setting can be disabled by
either of the following two methods.
• Double-click the MonitorCom.exe file from your Explorer to open the System Information settings and disable auto-starting under the Auto-start
settings.
• Click the right mouse button at the top of an Overview Display and then
click the Yes Button on the dialog box that will appear to open the System
Information settings. Disable auto-starting under the Auto-start settings.
224
Checking Configurations
Section 5-7
Note
In Windows Vista, the following dialog box will be displayed when you change
the automatic run settings. This is generated by the Windows Vista User
Account Control and it does not indicate any problem. Select to allow access.
5-7-3
Ending the Monitor Process
1,2,3...
1. Click the Close Button in the upper right corner of the Overview Screen.
2. If a monitor process such as data collection or trend collection is in
progress, a dialog box will be displayed to confirm that the monitor process
is to be ended. Click the Yes Button.
3. The monitor process will be ended.
225
Checking Configurations
226
Section 5-7
SECTION 6
Troubleshooting
This section describes errors that can occur while using the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
227
Section 6
Troubleshooting
The following table shows the causes of errors that may occur during CX-Process Monitor Plus operations, and the action to take to clear the errors. Clear
the cause of the error using the table below.
Phenomenon
Cannot display Tag names.
Cause
No tag names have been registered in
the tag settings for Monitor Plus using
CX-Process Tool.
The Loop Control Unit reads Informa- The computer communications type settion Not Refreshed in the System
ting in the System Monitor Builder
Monitor Screen.
Screen is incorrect.
The Loop Control Unit’s address in the
System Monitor Screen’s node settings
and the actual Loop Control Unit’s
address do not agree.
The Monitor Tag settings between CXError in Data Refresh Check is disProcess Tool and CX-Process Monitor
played in the System Monitor MesPlus agree, but the Function Block data
sages.
when the Monitor Tag settings were
made using CX-Process Tool have not
been downloaded to the Loop Control
Unit.
Power supply to the PLC Unit is turned
OFF.
Communications cable is not connected.
Cannot move from the Overview
The tag number registered using CXScreen to the Control Screens or Tun- Process Tool cannot be set correctly in
ing Screens.
the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
If the communications type setting is not
Error in Data Link Status CommuniCLK, the power supply to the PLC is
cations is displayed in the System
turned OFF, or the communications
Monitor Messages.
cable is not connected.
The message dialog box Could Not
FinsGateway Serial Unit initialization
Initialize FinsGateway is displayed.
failed. (i.e., network address set using
CX-Process Tool and FinsGateway
Serial Unit network address do not
agree.)
Definitions Don’t Agree With System
is displayed in the System Monitor
Messages.
A timeout occurred in communications with the [email protected], [email protected] PLC.
228
Action
Register the tag name using CX-Process Tool, and then compile the tags for
Monitor Plus.
Change the communications type setting.
Change the Loop Control Unit’s address
in the node settings to agree with the
actual Loop Control Unit’s address.
Download the Function Block from
when the Tags were set using CX-Process Tool to the Loop Control Unit, and
restart the Loop Control Unit.
Turn ON the power supply to the PLC
Unit.
Connect the communications cable.
Reset the Tags using the Graphic
Builder Screen and the CRT Builder
Screen.
Turn ON the power supply to the PLC
Unit, or connect the communications
cable.
1. Make sure the network address set
using CX-Process Tool, and FinsGateway Serial Unit network address
agree.
2. Compile the Monitor Tags, and then
reset the node PLC using the System
Monitor Builder Screen.
3. (If the above two actions fail)
Clear the Initialize Serial Port check box
using the System Monitor Builder
Screen.
The actual Loop Control Unit in the Sys- Register the actual Loop Control Unit
tem Monitor Builder Screen has not
using all the System Monitor Builders.
been set using the System Monitor
Builder.
The network address when the Tag set- 1. Make sure the network address and
tings were made using CX-Process
node address set using CX-Process
Tool, and the node address settings, do
tool, and the actual node address
not agree with the actual Unit.
agree.
2. Compile the monitor Tags using CXProcess Tool, and then reset the node
PLC using the System Monitor Builder Screen.
A timeout occurred in communications
with the CPU Unit.
Check to make sure that the PLC power
is turned ON.
Check to make sure that the FinsGateway settings are correct.
Section 6
Troubleshooting
Phenomenon
Cause
An illegal response was received from An illegal response was received from
the [email protected], [email protected] PLC.
the CPU Unit.
A timeout occurred in communications with an LCB registered at [email protected],
[email protected]
A timeout occurred in communications with an LCU registered at [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected]
An illegal response was received from
an LCB registered at [email protected], [email protected]
An illegal response was received from
an LCU registered at [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected]
The LCB model registered at the
[email protected], [email protected] is incorrect.
The LCU model registered at [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected] is incorrect.
The EM bank number for the LCB
registered at [email protected], [email protected] is incorrect.
The HMI interface setting for the LCB
registered at [email protected], [email protected] is incorrect.
Block Execution Error is displayed in
the System Monitor Messages.
Unit Address Setting Disagrees With
Actual Unit Number is displayed in
the System Monitor Messages.
ERROR CODE: is displayed during
Loop Control Unit Run/stop in the
System Monitor Screen.
An address error message is displayed on the System Monitor
Screen.
A timeout occurred in communications
with the Loop Controller.
Action
Check to make sure that the FinsGateway settings are correct.
Check for an error at the CPU Unit and
remove the cause of the error if necessary.
Check to make sure that the Loop Controller is correctly installed.
An illegal response was received from
the Loop Controller.
Check to make sure that the Loop Controller is correctly installed.
Check for an error at the Loop Controller.
The Loop Controller model is incorrect.
The registered Loop Controller is not
the one that is connected. Check the
model.
The EM bank number used by the LCB
is incorrectly set.
The EM bank numbers that can be used
by Loop Control Boards are 0 to C. Set
a number within this range.
The HMI interface settings for the LCB The CX-Process Monitor Plus will not
are not enabled.
operate correctly if the HMI interface
settings for the LCB are not enabled.
Enable the HMI interface settings.
An execution error has occurred in the 1. Click the E Button on the Loop ConFunction Block data downloaded to the
trol Unit in the System Monitor
Loop Control Unit.
Screen.
2. Click the Execution Error Button in
the Function Block Error Dialog Box.
3. Check the Execution error’s Function
Block using the Details Of Function
Block Error Dialog Box.
4. Correct the settings for the relevant
Function Block using CX-Process
Tool.
The actual Loop Control Unit’s address Make sure the actual Loop Control
and the node PLC’s Unit address in the Unit’s address and the System Monitor
System Monitor Builder Screen do not Builder’s node PLC Unit’s address
agree.
agree.
The FinsGateway setting or the network Correct the FinsGateway setting and
setting is incorrect.
the network settings.
It’s possible that the ladder program or Check the ladder program and Unit conanother Unit is writing data to the area figuration to see if the system informaof memory used for system information. tion area is being written to.
The system information is stored in the
following areas.
DM 16020 to DM 16044 for the Loop
Control Unit
20 words from the first word used for the
HMI for the Loop Control Board
229
Section 6
Troubleshooting
Phenomenon
Cause
Action
Monitoring cannot be performed normally.
After generating the tag file for Monitor
Plus, newly updated tag information or
network settings have not been set correctly.
After generating the tag file for Monitor
Plus, the data set with the CX-Process
Tool has not been downloaded to the
Loop Control Unit/Board.
It’s possible that the ladder program or
another Unit is writing data to the area
of memory used for data exchange
between the function blocks and the
CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Correctly set the tag information of network settings updated on a Builder
Screen.
Tag names that are newly set cannot
be set.
230
The CX-Process Monitor Plus was not
restarted after generating a tag file for
Monitor Plus during CX-Process Monitor Plus operation.
After changing the program with the CXProcess Tool and generating the tag file
for Monitor Plus, download the data that
was set to the Loop Control Unit/Board.
Check the ladder program and Unit configuration to see if any of the following
areas of memory are being written to.
Loop Control Units: Memory area specified for Send All Block
Loop Control Board: Memory area
being used by the HMI
Restart the CX-Process Monitor Plus.
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
The following tables show which tag ITEMs can be monitored or set using CX-Process Monitor Plus for function blocks for which CSV tags are set.
Basic PID (Block Model 011)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
Contact
input
000
MT_ST
Stop block operation command(0:
Cancel stop, 1:
Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
007
PV
PV input
–15.00 to
+115.00%
HH_SP
High/high alarm
setting
009
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
OverControl Tuning
Trend
view
Screens Screens Screens
Screen
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R
R
(Color) (Color)
R
Alarm
Log
Screens
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
H_SP
High alarm setting –15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
010
L_SP
Low alarm setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
011
LL_SP
Low/low alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
013
HH
High/high alarm
output
0 or 1
R
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
014
H
High alarm output
0 or 1
R
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
015
L
Low alarm output
0 or 1
R
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
016
LL
Low/low alarm
output
0 or 1
R
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
017
ALM_ OFF Alarm stop switch
0: Alarm, 1: Stop
0 or 1
R
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
PV_ ABN
PV execution
error display
0:Normal,
1:Error → MANUAL mod
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
023
SP
Local Set Point
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
W
W
024
CAS_ SET Set Point setting
mode
0: Local only
1: Remote/Local
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
026
R/L_ SW
Remote/Local
switch0: Local1:
Remote
Note: Valid only
when ITEM024 is
1
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
029
SP
Current Set Point
output
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
Parameter 035
AT
AT command/AT
Executing
0.1
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
041
DVA_ SP
Deviation alarm
setting (Hysteresis is set at
ITEM012.)
0 to
115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
042
DVA
Deviation alarm
output
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
Parameter 008
Contact
output
Contact
output
Parameter 019
Analog
output
Contact
output
R
W
R
R
R
R
R
231
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
ITEM
type
ITEM
Parameter 054
Contact
output
Contact
input
Tag ITEM
Data
description
P
Proportional band
055
I
056
D
076
077
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
OverControl Tuning
Trend
view
Screens Screens Screens
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Integral time (0:
0 to
No integral action) 9999 s
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Differential time
(0: No differential
action)
0 to
9999 s
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
MH_ LMT
High MV limit
±320.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
ML_ LMT
Low MV limit
±320.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
078
MHA
MV upper limit
output value
1: Upper limit or
more
0: Less than
upper limit
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
079
MLA
MV lower limit out- 0 or 1
put value
1: Lower limit or
less
0: Greater than
lower limit
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
086
A/M_ SW
Auto/Manual
0 or 1
switch
0: Manual, 1: Auto
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
MV
Host display of
MV
±320.00%
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
091
MV_ ABN
MV execution
error display
0: Normal, 1:
Error
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
098
MV_ IDX
MV execution
error display
0: Normal, 1:
Error
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
099
OP_ MK
Label
0 to 15
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Parameter 089
0.1 to
999.9%
Batch
Trend
Screen
Alarm
Log
Screens
R
R
Alarm
Log
Screens
Note Only optional tags can be set.
Advanced PID (Block Model 012)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
000
MT_ST
Stop block operation command(0:
Cancel stop, 1:
Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
007
PV
PV input
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
Parameter
008
HH_SP
High/high alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
009
H_SP
High alarm setting –15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
010
L_SP
Low alarm setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
011
LL_ SP
Low/low alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
013
HH
High/high alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
014
H
High alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
015
L
Low alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
016
LL
Low/low alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
output
232
R
(Color)
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R
(Color)
Contact
input
017
ALM_OFF Alarm stop switch
0: Alarm, 1: Stop
0 or 1
Parameter
019
PV_ ABN
PV execution
error display
0:Normal,
1:Error → MANUAL mode
0 or 1
023
SP
Local Set Point
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
W
W
024
CAS_SET
Set Point setting
mode (default)0:
Local only1:
Remote/Local
Note: Setting to 0
invalidates
ITEM026.
0 or 1
R
R
026
R/L_SW
Remote/Local
switch
0: Local, 1:
Remote
Note: Valid only
when ITEM024 is
1
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
Analog
output
029
SP
Current Set Point
output
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
Parameter
035
AT
AT command/AT
Executing
0.1
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
041
DVA_SP
Deviation alarm
setting (Hysteresis is set at
ITEM012.)
0 to
115.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Contact
output
042
DVA
Deviation alarm
output
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
Parameter
054
P
Proportional band
0.1 to
999.9%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
055
I
Integral time (0:
0 to
No integral action) 9999 s
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
056
D
Differential time
(0: No differential
action)
0 to
9999 s
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
076
MH_LMT
High MV limit
±320.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
077
ML_ LMT
Low MV limit
±320.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Contact
output
078
MHA
High MV limit
arrival output
1: Limit or more,
0: Less than limit
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
output
079
MLA
Low MV limit
arrival output
1: Limit or less,
0: Not limit or less
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input/
parameter
086
A/M_SW
Auto/Manual
0 or 1
switch
0: Manual, 1: Auto
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
Parameter
089
MV
Host display of
MV
±320.00%
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
091
MV_ABN
MV execution
error display
0: Normal, 1:
Error
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
098
MV_ IDX
MV index position
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
099
OP_MK
Label
0 to 15
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Alarm
Log
Screens
R
W
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note Only optional tags can be set.
233
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
2-position ON/OFF (Block Model 001)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
AnnunAlarm
ciator
Log
Screens Screens
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
000
MT_ST
Stop block operation command(0:
Cancel stop, 1:
Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
007
PV
PV input
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
HH_SP
High/high alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
009
H_SP
High alarm setting –15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
010
L_SP
Low alarm setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
011
LL_ SP
Low/low alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
041
DVA_SP
Deviation alarm
setting
0 to
115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
W
013
HH
High/high alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
014
H
High alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
015
L
Low alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
016
LL
Low/low alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
042
DVA
Deviation alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
017
ALM_OFF Alarm stop switch
0 or 1
R
(Color)
PV_ ABN
PV execution
error display
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
023
SP
Local Set Point
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
W
W
024
CAS_SET Set Point setting
mode
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
026
R/L_SW
Remote/Local
switch
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
029
SP
Current Set Point
output
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
Parameter 093
MV
Host display of
MV
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
OP_MK
Label
0 to 15
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Parameter 008
Contact
output
Contact
input
Parameter 019
Analog
output
099
Note Only optional tags can be set.
234
R
(Color)
R/W
R
W
R
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
3-position ON/OFF (Block Model 002)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control
Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Alarm
Log
Screens
Contact
input
000
MT_ST
Stop block operation command(0:
Cancel stop, 1:
Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
007
PV
PV input
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
HH_SP
High/high alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
009
H_SP
High alarm setting –15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
010
L_SP
Low alarm setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
011
LL_ SP
Low/low alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
041
DVA_SP
Deviation alarm
setting
0 to
115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
013
HH
High/high alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
014
H
High alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
015
L
Low alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
016
LL
Low/low alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
042
DVA
Deviation alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
017
ALM_OFF Alarm stop switch
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
PV_ABN
PV execution
error display
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
023
SP
Local Set Point
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
W
W
024
CAS_SET Set Point setting
mode
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
026
R/L_SW
Remote/Local
switch
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
029
SP
Current Set Point
output
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
093
MVH
Host display of
MVH
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
095
MVL
Host display of
MVL
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
OP_MK
Label
0 to 15
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Parameter 008
Contact
output
Contact
input
Parameter 019
Analog
output
Parameter 099
R
(Color)
W
R
Note Only optional tags can be set.
235
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
Blended PID (Block Model 013)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control
Screens
Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
000
MT_ST
Stop block operation command
(0: Cancel stop,
1: Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
007
PV
PV input
0 to 9999
Parameter
027
K1
Ratio
0 to 3.2000
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Accumu- 012
lated
value out013
put
Q1
Accumulated
value
0 to 9999
R
R
R
R
R
Q2
Accumulated
value
0 to 9999
R
R
R
R
R
016
Y1
Instantaneous
value output
0 to 320.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
029
Y2
Current Set Point
instantaneous
value output
0 to 320.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
031
Cumulative deviation High/high
alarm output
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
032
Cumulative deviation High alarm
setting
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
033
Cumulative deviation Low alarm
setting
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
034
Cumulative deviation Low/low
alarm setting
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Analog
output
Parameter
Contact
output
R
R
(Color) (Color)
R
AnnunAlarm
ciator
Log
Screens Screens
036
DHH
Cumulative deviation High/high
alarm output
0 or 1
R
R
(Color) (Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
037
DH
Cumulative deviation High alarm
output
0 or 1
R
R
(Color) (Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
038
DL
Cumulative deviation Low alarm
output
0 or 1
R
R
(Color) (Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
039
DLL
Cumulative deviation Low/low
alarm output
0 or 1
R
R
(Color) (Color)
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
017
ALM_OFF
Alarm stop
switch
0 or 1
R
R
(Color) (Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
014
S1
Counter reset
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Parameter
054
P
Proportional
band
0.1 to
999.9%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
055
I
Integral time
0 to 9999 s
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
056
D
Differential time
0 to 9999 s
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
076
MH_LMT
High MV limit
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
077
ML_ LMT
Low MV limit
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Contact
input
086
A/M_SW
Auto/Manual
switch
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Parameter
089
MV
Host display of
MV
±320.00%
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
091
MV_ABN
MV error display
0: Normal, 1:
Error
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
098
MV_ IDX
MV index position
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
099
OP_MK
Label
0 to 15
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Note Only optional tags can be set.
236
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
Batch Flowrate Capture (Block Model 014)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control
Screens
Tuning
Screens
Trend
Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
000
MT_ST
Stop block operation command(0: Cancel
stop, 1: Stop)
0 or 1
Accumulated value
input
007
P1
PV input
0 to 9999
Accumulated value
output
012
Q1
Accumulated
value (lower 4
digits)
0000 to
9999
R
R
R
R
R
013
Q2
Accumulated
value (upper 4
digits)
0000 to
9999
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
014
S3
Accumulation
counter reset
switch
(1: Reset)
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Analog
output
016
Y1
Instantaneous
value output
0 to
320.00%
R
R
R
R
R
Parameter
023
SP
Local SP setting
0 to 9999
W
W
Contact
input/
parameter
026
R/L_SW
Remote/Local
switching
0: Local, 1:
Remote
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Accumulated
value output
029
SP
Current Set
Point output
0 to 9999
R
R
R
R
R
R
032
B0
Overrun setting 0 to 9999
(value subtracted from BM)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
033
BP
Pre-batch set0 to 9999
ting (value subtracted from BM)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
034
B1
Flowrate limitation
0 to 9999
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Analog
output
035
SM
Batch accumulated value
(lower 4 digits)
Fixed value
0000 to
9999
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
Contact
input
036
S1
Run switch
(0: Reset, 1:
Run)
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
037
S2
Control interrupt switch (1:
Interrupt)
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
038
U1
Main batch output
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
Contact
output
R (Color) R
(Color)
R
Alarm
Log
Screens
W
R
039
U2
Pre-batch output 0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
Contact
input/
parameter
086
A/M_SW
SW
0: Manual, 1:
Auto
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
Parameter
089
MV
Host display of
MV
±320.00%
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
091
MV_ABN MV error display
0: Normal, 1:
Error
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
098
MV_IDX
MV index position
–15 to
115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
099
OP_MK
Label
0 to 15
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
Note Only optional tags can be set.
237
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
Indication and Setting (Block Model 031)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Alarm
Log
Screens
Contact
input
000
MT_ST
Stop block operation command(0: Cancel
stop, 1: Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
007
PV
PV input
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
HH_SP
High/high alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
009
H_SP
High alarm setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
010
L_SP
Low alarm setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
011
LL_ SP
Low/low alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
013
HH
High/high alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
014
H
High alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
015
L
Low alarm output 0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
016
LL
Low/low alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
017
ALM_OFF Alarm stop
switch
0: Alarm, 1: Stop
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
PV_ABN
PV error display
0: Normal, 1:
Error
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
023
SP
Local Set Point
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
W
W
024
CAS_SET
Set Point setting
mode
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input/
parameter
026
R/L_SW
Remote/Local
switch
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
Analog
output
029
SP
Current Set Point
output
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
OP_MK
Label
0 to 15
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Parameter 008
Contact
output
Contact
input
Parameter 019
Parameter 099
Note Only optional tags can be set.
238
R
(Color)
W
R
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
Indication and Operation (Block Model 032)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
AnnunAlarm
ciator
Log
Screens Screens
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
000
MT_ST
Stop block operation command(0:
Cancel stop, 1:
Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
007
PV
PV input
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
HH_SP
High/high alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
009
H_SP
High alarm setting –15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
010
L_SP
Low alarm setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
011
LL_ SP
Low/low alarm
setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
013
HH
High/high alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
014
H
High alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
015
L
Low alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
016
LL
Low/low alarm
output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
017
ALM_OFF Alarm stop switch
0: Alarm, 1: Stop
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
Parameter 019
PV_ABN
PV error display
0: Normal, 1:
Error
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
Parameter 076
MH_LMT
High MV limit
±320.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
077
ML_ LMT
Low MV limit
±320.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
078
MHA
MV upper limit
output value
1: Upper limit or
more
0: Less than
upper limit
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
079
MLA
MV lower limit out- 0 or 1
put value
1: Lower limit or
less
0: Greater than
lower limit
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Analog
input
084
X1
Auto input
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
086
A/M_SW
Auto/Manual
0 or 1
switch
0: Manual, 1: Auto
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
MV
Inversion of host
display of MV
±320.00%
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
091
MV_ ABN
MV execution
error display
0: Normal, 1:
Error
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
098
MV_ IDX
MV index position
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
099
OP_MK
Label
0 to 15
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Parameter 008
Contact
output
Contact
input
Parameter 089
±320.00%
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
Note Only optional tags can be set.
239
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
Ratio Setting (Block Model 033)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
AnnunAlarm
ciator
Log
Screens Screens
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
Contact
input
000
MT_ST
Stop block operation command (0:
Cancel stop, 1:
Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
007
PV
Reference input
–15.00 to
+115.00%
Parameter
019
PV_ ABN
PV error display
0: Normal, 1: Error
0 or 1
023
SP
Local ratio setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
024
CAS_SET Ratio setting mode
0: Local only
1: Remote/Local
026
R/L_SW
Remote/Local
0 or 1
switch
0: Local, 1: Remote
054
K1
Ratio range (sets
signal ratio range
corresponding to
Set Point=100%)
±10.000
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
055
A1
Input bias
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
056
B1
Output bias
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
076
MH_LMT
High MV limit
±320.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
±320.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Contact
input
Parameter
R
(Color)
R/W
0 or 1
R/W
077
ML_ LMT
Low MV limit
Contact
input
086
A/M_SW
Auto/Manual switch 0 or 1
0: Manual, 1: Auto
Parameter
089
MV
Host display of MV
±320.00%
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
091
MV_ ABN
MV error display
0: Normal, 1: Error
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
098
MV_ IDX
MV index position
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
099
OP_MK
Label
0 to 15
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Note Only optional tags can be set.
240
R
R
R
R
R
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
Indicator (Block Model 034)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
AnnunAlarm
ciator
Log
Screens Screens
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
000
MT_ST
Stop block operation
command(0: Cancel stop, 1: Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
007
PV
PV input
–15.00 to
+115.00%
HH_SP
High/high alarm set- –15.00 to
ting
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
009
H_SP
High alarm setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
010
L_SP
Low alarm setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
011
LL_ SP
Low/low alarm setting
–15.00 to
+115.00%
R
(– only)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
013
HH
High/high alarm out- 0 or 1
put
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
014
H
High alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
015
L
Low alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
016
LL
Low/low alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
017
ALM_OFF Alarm stop switch
0: Alarm, 1: Stop
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
(Color)
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
PV_ ABN
PV error display
0: Normal, 1: Error
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
OP_MK
Label
0 to 15
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Parame- 008
ter
Contact
output
Contact
input
Parame- 019
ter
099
R
(Color)
Control Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
R/W
R
Note Only optional tags can be set.
High/Low Alarm (Block Model 111)
ITEM
type
Analog
input
ITEM
008
PV
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
PV input
±320.00%
R
R
R
R
R
AnnunAlarm
ciator
Log
Screens Screens
H_SP
High setting
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
L_SP
Low setting
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
012
H
High alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
013
L
Low alarm output
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Parame- 009
ter
010
Contact
output
Tag ITEM
Note Only optional tags can be set.
241
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
Segment Program 2 (Block Model 157)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag
ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control
Screens
Tuning
Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
Trend
Screens
Graphic
Screens
R
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
Contact
input
000
MT_ SW Stop block operation
command(0: Cancel stop, 1: Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
007
X1
Reference input
±320.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
Analog
output
008
Y1
Program output
±320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/W
Analog
output
009
Y2
Elapsed time unit
0 to 3200.0
011
Y3
Step output
0 to 30
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
013
S1
Run/stop command
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
014
S2
Hold switch
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
Contact
output
015
U1
X1 input error
0 or 1
016
U2
Arrival at final segment
0 or 1
Contact
input
017
S3
Move to next wait
command
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
018
S4
Move to next step
command
0 or 1
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
019
U10
Waiting
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
Parameter
022
B0
Default
±320.00%
R
R
R/W
023
A1
Step1 Time width
0 to 3200.0
024
B1
Step1 Output value
±320.00%
R/W for
each
step
R/W
025
J1
Step1 Time unit
0 to 2
026
A1
Step2 Time width
0 to 3200.0
R/W
027
B1
Step2 Output value
±320.00%
R/W
028
J1
Step2 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
029
A1
Step3 Time width
0 to 3200.0
R/W
030
B1
Step3 Output value
±320.00%
R/W
031
J1
Step3 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
032
A1
Step4 Time width
0 to 3200.0
R/W
033
B1
Step4 Output value
±320.00%
R/W
034
J1
Step4 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
035
A1
Step5 Time width
0 to 3200.0
R/W
036
B1
Step5 Output value
±320.00%
R/W
037
J1
Step5 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
038
A1
Step6 Time width
0 to 2
R/W
039
B1
Step6 Output value
±320.00%
R/W
040
J1
Step6 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
041
A1
Step7 Time width
0 to 3200.0
R/W
042
B1
Step7 Output value
±320.00%
R/W
043
J1
Step7 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
044
A1
Step8 Time width
0 to 3200.0
R/W
045
B1
Step8 Output value
±320.00%
R/W
046
J1
Step8 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
047
A1
Step9 Time width
0 to 3200.0
R/W
048
B1
Step9 Output value
±320.00%
R/W
049
J1
Step9 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
050
A1
Step10 Time width
0 to 3200.0
051
B1
Step10 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
052
J1
Step11 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
053
A1
Step11 Time width
0 to 3200.0
054
B1
Step11 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
055
J1
Step11 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
056
A1
Step12 Time width
0 to 3200.0
057
B1
Step12 Output value ±320.00%
242
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Annunciator
Screens
Alarm
Log
Screens
R
R/W
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
ITEM
type
Parameter
ITEM
Tag
ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control
Screens
Tuning
Screens
Segment
Program
2 Screen
058
J1
Step12 Time unit
0 to 2
059
A1
Step13 Time width
0 to 3200.0
060
B1
Step13 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
061
J1
Step13 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
062
A1
Step14 Time width
0 to 3200.0
063
B1
Step14 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
064
J1
Step14 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
065
A1
Step15 Time width
0 to 3200.0
066
B1
Step15 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
067
J1
Step15 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
068
A1
Step16 Time width
0 to 3200.0
069
B1
Step16 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
070
J1
Step16 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
071
A1
Step17 Time width
0 to 3200.0
072
B1
Step17 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
073
J1
Step17 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
074
A1
Step18 Time width
0 to 3200.0
075
B1
Step18 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
076
J1
Step18 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
077
A1
Step19 Time width
0 to 3200.0
078
B1
Step19 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
079
J1
Step19 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
080
A1
Step20 Time width
0 to 3200.0
081
B1
Step20 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
082
J1
Step20 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
083
A1
Step21 Time width
0 to 3200.0
084
B1
Step21 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
085
J1
Step21 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
086
A1
Step22 Time width
0 to 3200.0
087
B1
Step22 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
088
J1
Step22 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
089
A1
Step23 Time width
0 to 3200.0
090
B1
Step23 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
091
J1
Step23 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
092
A1
Step24 Time width
0 to 3200.0
093
B1
Step24 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
094
J1
Step24 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
095
A1
Step25 Time width
0 to 3200.0
096
B1
Step25 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
097
J1
Step25 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
098
A1
Step26 Time width
0 to 3200.0
099
B1
Step26 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
100
J1
Step26 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
101
A1
Step27 Time width
0 to 3200.0
102
B1
Step27 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
103
J1
Step27 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
104
A1
Step28 Time width
0 to 3200.0
105
B1
Step28 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
106
J1
Step28 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
107
A1
Step29 Time width
0 to 3200.0
108
B1
Step29 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
109
J1
Step29 Time unit
0 to 2
R/W
110
A1
Step30 Time width
0 to 3200.0
111
B1
Step30 Output value ±320.00%
R/W
112
J1
Step30 Time unit
R/W
0 to 2
R/W for
each
step
Batch
Trend
Screen
Trend
Screens
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
Alarm
Log
Screens
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
243
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control
Screens
Tuning
Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
● Wait setting
Parameter
244
121
WT_SP01
122
WT_TM01 Step1 Wait time
Step1 Wait width
0 to 3200.0
123
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
Step2 Wait width
0 to 320.00%
R/W for
each
step
R/W
R/W
R/W
124
WT_TM01 Step2 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
125
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
Step3 Wait width
126
WT_TM01 Step3 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
127
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
Step4 Wait width
128
WT_TM01 Step4 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
129
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
Step5 Wait width
130
WT_TM01 Step5 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
131
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
Step6 Wait width
132
WT_TM01 Step6 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
133
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
Step7 Wait width
134
WT_TM01 Step7 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
135
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
Step8 Wait width
136
WT_TM01 Step8 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
137
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
Step9 Wait width
138
WT_TM01 Step9 Wait time
0 to 320.0
R/W
139
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
140
WT_TM01 Step10 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
141
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
142
WT_TM01 Step11 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
143
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
144
WT_TM01 Step12 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
145
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
146
WT_TM01 Step13 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
147
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
148
WT_TM01 Step14 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
149
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
150
WT_TM01 Step15 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
151
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
152
WT_TM01 Step16 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
153
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
154
WT_TM01 Step17 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
155
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
156
WT_TM01 Step18 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
157
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
158
WT_TM01 Step19 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
159
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
160
WT_TM01 Step20 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
161
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
162
WT_TM01 Step21 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
163
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
164
WT_TM01 Step22 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
165
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
166
WT_TM01 Step23 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
167
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
168
WT_TM01 Step24 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
169
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
170
WT_TM01 Step25 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
171
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
172
WT_TM01 Step26 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
173
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
174
WT_TM01 Step27 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
Step10 Wait width
Step11 Wait width
Step12 Wait width
Step13 Wait width
Step14 Wait width
Step15 Wait width
Step16 Wait width
Step17 Wait width
Step18 Wait width
Step19 Wait width
Step20 Wait width
Step21 Wait width
Step22 Wait width
Step23 Wait width
Step24 Wait width
Step25 Wait width
Step26 Wait width
Step27 Wait width
Trend
Screens
Graphic
Screens
AnnunAlarm
ciator
Log
Screens Screens
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
ITEM
type
Parameter
ITEM
Tag ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
Step28 Wait width
0 to 320.00%
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control
Screens
Tuning
Screens
Segment
Program
2 Screen
175
WT_SP01
176
WT_TM01 Step28 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
177
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
178
WT_TM01 Step29 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
179
WT_SP01
0 to 320.00%
R/W
180
WT_TM01 Step30 Wait time
0 to 3200.0
R/W
Step29 Wait width
Step30 Wait width
R/W for
each
step
Batch
Trend
Screen
Trend
Screens
Graphic
Screens
AnnunAlarm
ciator
Log
Screens Screens
R/W
R/W
R/W
● Step Executing flag
Contact
output
221
U11
Step1 Executing
flag
0 or 1
222
U12
Step2 Executing
flag
0 or 1
223
U13
Step3 Executing
flag
0 or 1
224
U14
Step4 Executing
flag
0 or 1
225
U15
Step5 Executing
flag
0 or 1
226
U16
Step6 Executing
flag
0 or 1
227
U17
Step7 Executing
flag
0 or 1
228
U18
Step8 Executing
flag
0 or 1
229
U19
Step9 Executing
flag
0 or 1
230
U20
Step10 Executing
flag
0 or 1
231
U21
Step11 Executing
flag
0 or 1
232
U22
Step12 Executing
flag
0 or 1
233
U23
Step13 Executing
flag
0 or 1
234
U24
Step14 Executing
flag
0 or 1
235
U25
Step15 Executing
flag
0 or 1
236
U26
Step16 Executing
flag
0 or 1
237
U27
Step17 Executing
flag
0 or 1
238
U28
Step18 Executing
flag
0 or 1
239
U29
Step19 Executing
flag
0 or 1
240
U30
Step20 Executing
flag
0 or 1
241
U31
Step21 Executing
flag
0 or 1
242
U32
Step22 Executing
flag
0 or 1
243
U33
Step23 Executing
flag
0 or 1
244
U34
Step24 Executing
flag
0 or 1
245
U35
Step25 Executing
flag
0 or 1
246
U36
Step26 Executing
flag
0 or 1
247
U37
Step27 Executing
flag
0 or 1
248
U38
Step28 Executing
flag
0 or 1
249
U39
Step29 Executing
flag
0 or 1
250
U40
Step30 Executing
flag
0 or 1
245
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
ON/OFF Valve Manipulator (Block Model 221)
ITEM
type
Contact
input
Parameter
ITEM Tag ITEM
Data description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control
Screens
Tuning
Screens
Trend
Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R
R
R
R
R
000
MT_SW
Stop block operation
command(0: Cancel
stop, 1: Stop)
0 or 1
012
S2
Auto input
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
013
S3
Manual input
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
015
S5
Open limit switch input 0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
016
S6
Close limit switch input 0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
022
U2
Valve action time error
(1:error)
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
023
U3
Valve open midway
(1: Open midway)
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
085
S4
Site manipulation
switch input
(0:Central; 1:Site)
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
086
A/M_SW Auto/Manual switching
0: Manual, 1: Auto
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
099
OP_MK
0 to 15
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Label
Alarm
Log
Screens
R
Note Only optional tags can be set.
Motor Manipulator (Block Model 222)
ITEM
type
Contact
input
ITEM
Tag
ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
OverControl
view
Screens
Screen
Tuning
Screens
Trend
Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R
R
R
R
R
Alarm
Log
Screens
000
MT_SW
Stop block operation
command(0: Cancel
stop, 1: Stop)
0 or 1
012
S2
Auto input
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
013
S3
Manual input
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
015
S5
Answer input
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
022
U2
Answer error
(1:error)
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
032
X1
CT input
–320.00 to
+320.00%
R
R
R
R
R
Parame- 033
ter
H_SP
CT input high alarm
setting
–320.00 to
+320.00%
R (–)
R
R
R
R/W
Contact
output
036
H
CT input high alarm
output
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
085
S4
Site manipulation
switch input
(0:Central; 1:Site)
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
A/M_SW Auto/Manual switching
0: Manual, 1: Auto
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
OP_MK
0 to 15
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Analog
input
Parame- 086
ter
099
Label
Note Only optional tags can be set.
246
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
Reversible Motor Manipulator (Block Model 223)
ITEM
type
Contact
input
ITEM
Tag
ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R
R
R
R
R
000
MT_SW
Stop block operation
command(0: Cancel
stop, 1: Stop)
0 or 1
012
S2
AUTO-FWD input
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
013
S3
AUTO-REV input
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
014
S4
MAN-FWD input
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
016
S6
MAN-REV input
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
018
S8
FWD answer input
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
019
S9
REV answer input
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
023
U3
Answer error
(1:error)
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
Analog
input
032
X1
CT input
–320.00 to
+320.00%
R
R
R
R
R
Parameter
033
H_SP
CT input high alarm
setting
–320.00 to
+320.00%
R (–)
R
R
R
R/W
Contact
output
036
H
CT input high alarm
output
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
085
S4
Site manipulation
switch input
(0:Central; 1:Site)
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
086
A/M_SW Auto/Manual switching
0: Manual, 1: Auto
0 or 1
R/W
R
099
OP_MK
0 to 15
R/W
R
Parameter
Label
Alarm
Log
Screens
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Note Only optional tags can be set.
247
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
Motor Opening Manipulator (Block Model 224)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Tag
ITEM
Data
description
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control Tuning
Trend
Screens Screens Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
Annunciator
Screens
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
000
MT_SW
Stop block operation
command(0: Cancel
stop, 1: Stop)
0 or 1
Analog
input
012
X2
Auto input
–320.00 to
+320.00%
R
R
R
R
R
R
Manual input target
opening setting
–320.00 to
+320.00%
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Parame- 013
ter
Contact
input
Alarm
Log
Screens
019
S3
Open monitor switch
thermal relay operation
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
020
S4
Close monitor switch
thermal relay operation
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
021
U1
Open manipulation
output
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
022
U2
Close manipulation
output
0:OFF; 1:ON
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
032
X1
Opening input
–320.00 to
+320.00%
R
R
R
R
R
Parame- 033
ter
H_SP
Opening input high
limit alarm setting
–320.00 to
+320.00%
R (–)
R
R
R
034
L_SP
Opening input low limit
alarm setting
–320.00 to
+320.00%
R (–)
R
R
R
036
H
Opening input high
limit alarm output
0 or 1
R
R
(Color) (Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
037
L
Opening input low limit
alarm output
0 or 1
R
R
(Color) (Color)
R
R
R
R
R
R
085
S2
Site manipulation
switch input
(1: Site, 1: Central)
0 or 1
R
(Color)
R
R
R
R
R
086
A/M_SW Auto/Manual switching 0 or 1
0: Manual, 1: Auto
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
OP_MK
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Contact
output
Analog
input
Contact
output
Contact
input
Parame- 099
ter
Label
0 to 15
Note Only optional tags can be set.
Timer (Block Model 205)
ITEM
type
ITEM Tag ITEM
Parame- 007
ter
008
SP
Data
description
Setting
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control
Screens
Tuning
Screens
Trend
Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
0 to 3200.0
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
PRESET Prediction (subtracted from setting)
0 to 3200.0
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
0 to 3200.0
R
R
R
R
R
Annunciator
Screens
Analog
output
009
PV
Time elapsed
Contact
input
011
S1
Run switch
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
012
S2
Interrupt switch
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
output
013
U1
Arrival at setting
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
014
U2
Arrival at prediction
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note Only optional tags can be set.
248
Alarm
Log
Screens
Appendix A
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
Counter (Block Model 208)
ITEM
type
ITEM
Parameter 007
Tag
ITEM
Setting
Data
range
CX-Process Monitor screen (R:Read W:Write)
Overview
Screen
Control
Screens
Tuning
Screens
Trend
Screens
Batch
Trend
Screen
Segment
Program
2 Screen
(See
note.)
Graphic
Screens
AnnunAlarm
ciator
Log
Screens Screens
0 to 9999
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
008
PRESET Prediction (subtracted from setting)
0 to 9999
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
80 Analog output
009
PV
Count
0 to 9999
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
input
010
S1
Run switch
0 or 1
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Contact
output
SP
Data
description
012
U1
Arrival at setting
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
013
U2
Arrival at prediction
0 or 1
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note Only optional tags can be set.
249
Reading/Writing Function Block ITEMs
250
Appendix A
Appendix B
Differences between Trend Screens and
Batch Trend Screens
The following table describes the functional differences between Trend Screens and Batch Trend Screens.
Item
Trend Screens
Batch Trend Screens
Realtime trends
Historical trends
Starting batch collection Collection starts when monitor processing is started. • Collection starts when the collection
(When the Run Button is clicked in the Setup Dialog start condition is satisfied by the trigger
tag (contact ITEM or analog ITEM).
Box or the Main Window.)
• Collection starts when the Batch Start
Request Button is clicked in the Batch
Trend Screen
• Collection stops when the collection
Stopping batch collection Collection stops when monitor processing is
start condition is not satisfied by the
stopped.
trigger tag (contact ITEM or analog
(When the CX-Process Monitor Plus is stopped, a
ITEM).
message is displayed to confirm that data collection
is to be stopped.)
• Collection stops when the Batch Stop
Request Button is clicked in the Batch
Trend Screen.
Maximum number of
60
120
120
registered screens
Maximum number of
480
960
960
tags
1 or 6 s
1, 5, 10, 30, or 60 min
Collection cycle
1, 2, 5, 10, or 30 s
• One collection cycle
• The setting is made for each screen.
• One collection cycle
setting is used for all
setting is used for all
screens.
screens.
4 hours (collection cycle: 1 s)
1-min cycle: 30 days
Collection time
1-s cycle: 10 hours
5-min cycle: 150 days
(depends on collection
2-s cycle: 20 hours
10 days (collection cycle: 1 min)
10-min cycle: 300 days
cycle)
5-s cycle: 50 hours
30-min cycle: 900 days
10-s cycle: 100 hours
60-min cycle: 1,800 days
30-s cycle: 300 hours
Saving collection data
• Data is saved up to the collection time.
• After data collection is stopped, the
data is saved as a batch trend file in
• From the collection time onwards, old data is
binary format. (It is automatically
deleted and the newest data is saved.
deleted when outside of the save time
set in the System Info Screen.)
• After the collection time has expired,
the next batch is immediately started if
the trigger condition is satisfied.
Saving CSV files
• A file is saved for each set save period (1 to 240
• CSV files are saved when data collechours).
tion is stopped).
• A file can be saved by clicking a button on the
• A file can be saved by clicking a button
Trend Screen.
on the Batch Trend Screen.
Other
Changing
Pens (tags) displayed on the Trend Screen can be
--functions
trend
changed, deleted, and added without stopping the
definitions CX-Process Monitor Plus.
online
Referenc--• Trend data collected previously can be
ing past
displayed on the Batch Trend Screen.
trend data
• Past data can be overlapped with
batch trend data currently being collected.
251
Differences between Trend Screens and Batch Trend Screens
252
Appendix B
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W428-E1-03
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
01
02
03
Date
Revised content
December 2003 Original production
January 2007 Revised for upgrade to version 2.0.
June 2009
Revised for upgrade to version 2.1.
253
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Automation & Drive Division
Automation Department 1
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81) 75-344-7084/Fax: (81) 75-344-7149
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,
IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
Authorized Distributor:
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200
OMRON Industrial Automation Global: www.ia.omron.com
© OMRON Corporation 2003 All Rights Reserved.
In the interest of product improvement,
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Printed in Japan
Cat. No. W428-E1-03
0609
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement